Introduction to

DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES

(Limit State Method)

1
Introduction
 Steel has made possible some of the grandest structures both in
the past and in the present days

 Structural steel is widely used in making:

 Transmission towers
 Industrial buildings
 Bridges
 Storage structures
 Water tanks
Anatomy

Beams
Columns
Floors
Bracing
Systems
Foundation
Connections

3
Syllabus
Module 1: Introduction:
Steel as Structural Material; Advantages and disadvantages of
steel; Types of sections , I. S. Rolled Sections; Material
Overview, Basis for Structural Design; Loadings and Load
Combinations

Module 2: Connections:
Types of Connections, Bolted Connections; Advantages and
disadvantages of bolted joints Design of bolted connections;
Efficiency and design of joints; Welded Connections;
Advantages and disadvantages of welded joints, Design of
welded connections; Fillet and butt welds, Plug and slot welds
4
Module 3: Eccentric Connections
Types of eccentric connections, Bolted and weld connections,
load lying in plane of joint, load lying perpendicular to the plane
of joint, Design of eccentric connection using bolts and welds

Module 4: Tension Members

Types of failures, Gross and net sectional area, Rupture of
critical section, Strength calculation; Block shear failure,
Slenderness ratio, Design of tension members; Gusset plates,
Lug angles; tension splices; Design of tension member
subjected to axial and bending

5
Module 5: Compression Members
Types of failures, Strength calculation ; slenderness ratio, Design of
compression member; Design of eccentrically loaded compression
member; Built-up compression members; Design of built-up
compression members; Design of lacing system; Design of batten
plate

Module 6: Flexural Members

Introduction to flexural members: Beams; Design procedure of beam
members; Design of laterally supported beams; Design of laterally
unsupported beams; Built-up beams; Design of purlins

Module 7: Column Base

Slab Base, Gusseted Base

Module 8: Gantry Girders

Codal aspects on design criteria on gantry girder
6
 Text Books/References

Design of Steel Structures

Dr. Subramanian Narayanan - Oxford Publication
Limit State Design of Steel Structures
S. K. Duggal –Tata McGraw Hill

7
 Text Books/References
Design of Steel Structures
by Elias G. Abu-Saba
– CBS Publishers and Distributors
Design of steel structures
by E.H. Gaylord, C.N. Gaylord
& J.E. Stallmeyer – McGraw Hill.
Structural Steel work: Analysis and Design
by S. S. Ray – Blackwell Science

8
Codes
 Code of practice for general construction in
steel  IS: 800 - 2007
 Handbook for structural engineers
 SP: 6(1) – 1964 (Reaffirmed 2003)
 IS 808 : 1989 (Reaffirmed 2004)
 Steel Tables of any standard publication.

 Code of practice for design loads (other than

earthquake) for buildings and structures
 IS 875 : Part I to V : 1987
 IRC for vehicle load etc. in Bridge structures
9
ROLLED STEEL SECTIONS
Indian Standard Junior Beam (ISJB) – JB
Indian Standard Light Beam (ISLB) – LB
Indian Standard Medium Weight Beam (ISMB)– MB
Indian Standard Wide Flange Beam (ISWB) – WB
Indian Standard Heavy Weight Beam (ISHB)– HB
Indian Standard column section (ISSC) – SC

10
ROLLED STEEL SECTIONS
I-Section

11
Channel – Sections
Indian Standard Junior Channel (ISJC) – JC
Indian Standard Light Channel (ISLC) – LC
Indian Standard Medium Weight (ISMC) – MC
Indian Standard parallel flange Channel (ISMCP)-MCP

12
 Angle – Sections
Indian Standard Equal Angel (ISA)

Indian Standard Unequal Angel (ISA)

13
Angle section
Tee – Sections
Indian Standard Normal Tee Bars (ISNT) – ISNT – NT
Indian Standard Deep Tee Bars (ISDT) – ISDT – DT
Indian Standard Light Tee Bars (ISLT) –ISLT – LT
Indian Standard Medium Tee Bars (ISNT) –ISMT – MT
Indian Standard Heavy Tee Bars (ISHT) –ISHT – HT

15
Rolled Steel Bar Section
Indian Standard Round Section-ISRO

Indian Standard Square Section-ISSQ

16
Rolled Steel Sections are designated as follows
ISRO100 means a round section of diameter 100mm,
while ISSQ50 means a square section each side of
which is 50mm.

100mm 50mm

17
 Rolled Steel sheets & strip
Indian Standard Steel Sheet Section- ISSH-SH
Indian Standard Steel Strip Section- ISST-ST

Rolled steel flats are designated by width of

the section in mm followed by the letter F &
thickness. Thus, 50 F 8 means a flat of
width 50 mm & thickness of 8 mm.

18
Square hollow section
Hollow section pipe

19
STEEL AS A STRUCTURAL
MATERIAL

1
Advantages of steel design

• Better quality control

• Lighter
• Faster to erect
• Reduced site time - Fast track Construction
• Large column free space and amenable for alteration
• Less material handling at site
• Less percentage of floor area occupied by structural
elements
• Has better ductility and hence superior lateral load
behavior; better earthquake resistance
2
Disadvantages of steel design

• Skilled labor is required.

• Higher cost of construction
• Maintenance cost is high.
• Poor fireproofing, as at 1000oF (538oC) 65% & at
1600oF (871oC) 15% of strength remains
• Electricity may be required.

3
 Chemical composition of steel:
Steel is an alloy which mainly contains iron and carbon. Apart from
the carbon a small percentage of manganese, silicon, phosphorus,
nickel and copper are also added to modify the specific properties of
the steel.
Chemical composition of structural steel (IS 2062-1992 & IS 8500)
Grade C Mn S P Si Carbon
Equivalent
Fe410WA 0.23 1.50 0.050 0.050 0.40 0.42
Fe410WB 0.22 1.50 0.045 0.045 0.40 0.41
Fe410WC 0.20 1.50 0.040 0.040 0.40 0.39
Fe 440 0.20 1.30 0.05(0.04) 0.05(0.04) 0.45 0.40
Fe 490 0.20 1.50 0.05(0.04) 0.05(0.04) 0.45 0.42
Fe 590 0.22 1.80 0.045(0.04) 0.045(0.04) 0.45 0.48
Notes:
1. Carbon Equivalent = (C+Mn)/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni+Cu)/15
2. The terms in the bracket denotes the maximum limit for the flat products. 4
Types of structural steel:
Different structural steel can be produced based on the
necessity by changing slightly the chemical composition and
manufacturing process.

1. Carbon steel: In this type of structural steel carbon and

manganese are used as extra elements.

2. High Strength Carbon Steel: By increasing the carbon

content this type of steel can be manufactured which
basically produces steel with comparatively higher
strength but less ductility.

3. Stainless Steel: In this type of steel mainly foreign

material like nickel and chromium are used along with
small percentage of carbon.
5
 Properties of structural steel
The important mechanical properties of steel are:
ultimate strength, yield stress, ductility,
weldabilty, toughness, corrosion resistance and machinability.

The last four properties are important for durability of material

and often associated with fabrication of steel members.
The mechanical properties of steel largely depend on its
 Chemical composition
 Heat treatment
 Stress history
 Rolling methods
 Rolling thickness

6
Structural Steel
The steel used for structural works shall confirm to IS 2062 :
2011 (Hot Rolled Medium and High Tensile Structural Steel).
Most Commonly used grade is Fe 410.
Followings are few physical properties of structural steel (As
per clause 2.2.4.1 of IS 800 : 2007):
 Unit mass of steel, ρ = 7850 kg/m3
 Modulus of elasticity, E = 2.0 × 105 N/mm2
 Poisson’s ratio, µ = 0.3
 Modulus of rigidity, G = 0.769 × 105 N/mm2
 Co-efficient of thermal expansion, α= 12 × 10-6 /oc
Mechanical properties:
Following are the most important mechanical properties that are
frequently used in design of steel structures.
Yield stress, fy
Ultimate stress, fu
Minimum percentage elongation
These properties can be obtained by performing tensile tests of the steel
sample.

Mechanical properties of structural steel products (Table 1 of IS 800 : 2007)

Grade of Yield Stress (MPa) Ultimate Tensile Elongation

Steel t<20 t = 20 to 40 t>40 Stress (MPa) Percentage
Fe 410 250 240 230 410 23
Fe 440 300 290 280 440 22
Fe 490 350 330 320 490 22
Fe 540 410 390 380 540 20
8
Some other important mechanical properties of steel

(i) Ductility: It is defined as

the property of a material by
virtue of which it undergoes
large inelastic i.e. permanent
deformation without loss of
strength under the
application of tensile load.

(ii) Hardness: It is one of the mechanical properties of steel

by virtue of which it offers resistance to the indentation and
scratching. The hardness of steel is measured by
 Brinell hardness test
 Vickers hardness test
 Rockwell hardness test
9
(iii) Toughness: It is one of the mechanical
properties of steel by virtue of which it offers
resistance to fracture under the action of
impact loading.
Toughness = The ability to absorb energy up
to fracture.
 Toughness is generally measured by the area
under the stress-strain curve.

(iv) Fatigue: It is defined as the damage caused by the repeated

fluctuation of stresses which leads to the progressive cracking of the
structural element.
Damage and failure of the material under the action of cyclic
loading.
(v) Resistance against corrosion:
In the presence of moist air corrosion of steel is an extremely important
aspect.
To avoid corrosion paint or metallic coating may be used
10
 Few important terms associated with structural steel:
(a) Residual Stress:
Residual stresses are defined as the stresses which are locked into a
component or assembly of parts. At the time of rolling of steel
sections, fabrication of steel members, they are subjected to very
high temperature and after that they are allowed to cool which is
basically an uneven process. Due to this uneven heating and cooling,
residual stress in the structural member is generated.

(b) Stress Concentration:

Stress concentration indicates a highly localized state of stress at a
particular location of a member. Generally, if there exists an abrupt
change in the shape of the member like in the vicinity of notch or
holes, the stress generated at that location is several times greater
than the stress that would generate without that sudden change in
geometry.

11
 Stress-strain curve for mild steel
Stress-Strain diagram for steel specimen is generally plotted by
performing tensile test, in which a specimen having gauge length
L0 and initial cross sectional area A0 is taken.
E
fu
Cʹ
F
fy Stress, f B
C D
A

O
Strain, ɛ

12
Part OA- In this region the stress is proportional to strain, and is called the
limit of proportionality.
Part AB- After reaching ‘A’, change in strain is rapid compared to that of
stress but still the material behaves elastically up to elastic limit ‘B’.
Cʹ - represents the upper yield point
C - represents the lower yield point.
Part CD- Beyond yield point the material starts flowing plastically without
any significant increase in the stress and material undergoes large
deformation.
Part DE- After reaching point ‘D’, the strain hardening in the material begins
which necessitates requirement of higher load to continue deformation. This
phenomenon is called ‘strain hardening’.
E represents the ultimate stress fu.
Part EF- When the stress reaches point ‘E’ that is the stress corresponding to
the ultimate stress, the necking in material begins.
F - represents breaking stress – the stress corresponding to the breaking load.
13
LIMIT STATE DESIGN
 DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES

Safety at ultimate load and serviceability at working load

Working Stress Method:
Safety is ensured by limiting the stress of the material. The material is
assumed to behave in linear elastic manner. In this approach the stress-strain
behaviour is considered to be linear.

Permissible stress < (Yield stress / Factor of safety)

Details at: IS 800 – 1984.

Permissible stress in steel structural members
Types of stress Notation Permissible Factor of
stress (Mpa) safety
Axial tension σat 0.6fy 1.67
Axial compression σac 0.6fy 1.67
Bending tension σbt 0.66fy 1.515
Bending compression σbc 0.66fy 1.515
Average shear stress τva 0.4fy 2.5
Bearing stress σp 0.75fy 1.33
USM: It is also referred to Plastic Design Method. In this case
the limit state is attained when the members reach plastic
moment strength Mp and the structure is attained into a
mechanism. The safety measure of the structure is taken care of
by an appropriate choice of load factor. It is multiplied to the
working load and it is checked w.r.t to the ultimate load
corresponding to the member.
Working Load×Load Factor ≤Ultimate Load

LSM: In limit state design method, the structure is designed in

such a way that it can safely withstand all kind of loads that
may act on the structure under consideration in its entire design
life. In this approach, the science of reliability based design was
developed with the objective of providing a rational solution to
the problem of adequate safety. Uncertainty is reflected in
loading and material strength.
 Limit State of Strength
Factors
Governing
Ultimate
Strength

Stability Fatigue Plastic Collapse

Stability Against
Sway Stability
Overturning
Limit State of Strength:

These are associated with the failure of the structure under the action
of worst possible combination of loads along with proper partial
safety factor that may lead to loss of life and property. As provided
in IS 800: 2007, Limit state of strength includes –
• Loss of equilibrium of the structure as a whole or in part.
• Loss of stability of the structure.
• Failure due to excess deformation or rupture.
• Fracture due to fatigue.
• Brittle fracture.
 Limit State Serviceability

Check for
Serviceability
Limit States

Deflection Vibration Durability Fire

limit limit consideration Resistance
Limit State of Serviceability:

These are associated with the discomfort faced by the user while
using the structure.
• Excess deflection or deformation of the structure.
• Excess vibration of the structure causing discomfort to the
commuters.
• Repairable damage or crack generated due to fatigue.
• Corrosion and durability
 Partial Safety Factor for Load
(Clause 5.3.3, Table 4, IS 800: 2007)
𝑄𝑑 = 𝛾𝑓𝑘 𝑄𝑐𝑘
𝑘
Where, 𝛾𝑓 = the partial safety factor for kth load or load effect, 𝑄𝑐
= Characteristic load or load effect, 𝑄𝑑 = Design load or load
effect.

Note
Characteristic values (loads/stresses) are defined as the values
that are not expected to be exceeded within the life of the
structure with more than 5% probability.

Generally partial factor of safety considered is in all cases higher

than unity. Whereas for serviceability limit states unit factor of
safety is considered as it is checked under the action of service
load for structure.
 Partial Safety Factor for Loads, 𝜸𝒇 (Table 4, IS 800: 2007)
Combinatio Limit State of Strength Limit State of Serviceability
ns DL LL WL/ AL DL LL WL/
Leadin Accompa EL Leading Accomp EL
g nying anying
DL+LL+CL 1.5 1.5 1.05 - -1.0 1.0 1.0 -
DL+LL+CL 1.2 1.2 1.05 0.6 -1.0 0.8 0.8 0.8
+WL/EL 1.2 1.2 0.53 1.2 -
DL+WL/EL 1.5 - - 1.5 - 1.0 - - 1.0
(0.9)
DL+ER 1.2 1.2 - - - - - - -
(0.9)
DL+LL+AL 1.0 0.35 0.35 - 1.0 - - - -
Notes:
(i) DL=dead load, LL=imposed (live) load, CL=crane load, WL=wind load, EL=earthquake
load, AL=accidental load.
(ii) During simultaneous action of different live loads one which has greater effect on the
member under consideration is considered as the leading live load.
(iii)Value in the bracket should be considered when dead load contributes to the stability
against overturning or it causes reduction in stress due to other loads.
 Partial Safety Factor for Material

Partial safety factor for material

𝑆𝑑 = 𝑆𝑢 /𝛾𝑚
Where, 𝛾𝑚 = Partial safety factor for material as given in Table 1.5.
𝑆𝑢 = Ultimate strength of the material, 𝑆𝑑 = Design strength of the
material.

Generally, a factor of unity (one) or less is applied to the

resistances of the material.
 Partial safety factor for material, 𝜸𝒎 (Table 5, IS 800: 2007)
Definition Partial Safety Factor
Resistance governed by yielding, 𝛾𝑚0 1.10
Resistance of member to buckling, 𝛾𝑚0 1.10
Resistance governed by ultimate stress, 1.25
𝛾𝑚1
Resistance of connection Shop Field
Fabrication Fabrication
(a) Bolts, friction type, 𝛾𝑚𝑓 1.25 1.25
(b) Bolts, bearing type, 𝛾𝑚𝑏 1.25 1.25
(c) Rivets, 𝛾𝑚𝑟 1.25 1.25
(d) Welds, 𝛾𝑚𝑤 1.25 1.50
 Deflection Limits (Table 6, IS 800: 2007)
Type of Deflection Design Member Supporting Maximum
Building Load Deflection
LL/WL Purlins and Elastic Cladding Span/150
girts Brittle Cladding Span/180
LL Simple span Elastic Cladding Span/240
Brittle Cladding Span/300
LL Cantilever Elastic Cladding Span/120
Vertical span Brittle Cladding Span/150
LL/WL Rafter Profiled Metal sheeting Span/180
Industrial supporting Plastered sheeting Span/240
Buildings CL(manual operation) Gantry Crane Span/500
CL (electric operation up to 50t) Gantry Crane Span/750

CL (electric operation over 50t) Gantry Crane Span/1000

No cranes Column Elastic Cladding Height/150

Brittle Cladding Height/240
Lateral Crane + wind Gantry Crane(absolute) Span/400
(lateral) Relative displacement 10mm
between rails supporting
crane
Crane + wind Column/fra Gantry(Elastic cladding, Height/200
me pendant operated)
Gantry(Brittle cladding, cab Height/400
operated)
 Deflection Limits (Table 6, IS 800: 2007)

Type of Building Deflection Design Member Supporting Maximum

Load Deflection
LL Floor & Roof Elements not Span/300
susceptible to
Other Vertical cracking
Buildings Elements Span/360
susceptible to
cracking
LL Cantilever Elements not Span/150
susceptible to
cracking
Elements Span/180
susceptible to
cracking
WL Building Elastic cladding Height/300
Lateral Brittle cladding Height/500
WL Inter story drift - Story
height/300
 Cross Sectional Classification (Clause 3.7, Table 2)

Class 1
Plastic

Classification of Cross Class 2

Section Compact

Class 3
Semi-Compact
 Load and Load Combinations

 Dead loads – [IS:875 (Part-1)]

 Imposed loads (i.e. Live loads, Crane loads etc) – [IS:875 (Part 2)]
 Wind loads – [IS:875 (Part-3)]
 Snow loads - [IS:875 (Part-4)]
 Temperature, Hydrostatic, Soil pressure, Fatigue, Accidental,
Impact, Explosions etc and load combinations [IS:875 (Part-5)]
 Earthquake load – [IS:1893-2002 (Part-1)]
 Erection loads – [IS:800-2007 Cl. 3.3]
 Other secondary effects such as temperature change, differential
settlement, eccentric connections etc.
 In IS:800-2007 (Cl. 5.3.1) the loads/actions acting on a structural
system has been classified in three groups, these are as follows:
 Permanent actions (Qp) – Action due to self-weight of the structural
components, basically the dead loads.
 Variable actions (Qv) – Action due to loads at construction and
service stage such as all type of imposed loads, wind and earthquake
loads etc.
 Accidental actions (Qa) – Action due to accidental loads acting on
the structure such as due to explosion, due to sudden impact etc.
 While designing the steel structure following load combination
must be considered along with partial safety factors
• Dead loads + Imposed loads
 Dead loads + Imposed loads + Wind / Earthquake loads
 Dead loads + Wind / Earthquake loads
 Dead loads + Erection loads
 Wind Load Calculation
Cl. 5.3, IS 875 (Part 3) 1987
Basic
wind Zone
The design wind speed (m/s) at any height z is speed, m/s
55 I
II
𝑉𝑧 = 𝑘1 𝑘2 𝑘3 𝑉𝑏 50
47 III
44 IV
Where, 𝑉𝑏 = Basic wind speed (Figure 1) 39 V
33 VI
𝑘1 = Probability factor (risk coefficient)
(Table 1)
𝑘2 = Terrain, height and structure size
factor (Table 2)
𝑘3 = Topography factor (Clause 5.3.3 )
 Design Wind Pressure
(cl. 5.4; IS 875 part 3)

Design wind pressure at any height above mean ground level

is obtained by

𝑝𝑧 = 0.6𝑉𝑧2

The wind pressure at any height of a structure

depends on following.
Velocity and density of the air
Height above ground level
Shape and aspect ratio of the building
Topography of the surrounding ground surface
Angle of wind attack
Solidity ratio or openings in the structure
 Design Wind Force:

1. The total wind load for a building as a whole is given by

𝐹 = 𝐶𝑓 𝐴𝑒 𝑝𝑧 [cl. 6.3 of IS 875 part-3 ]

Where, 𝐶𝑓 =Force coefficient of the building

𝐴𝑒 = Effective frontal area
𝑝𝑧 = design wind pressure

2. Wind force on roof and walls is given by

𝐹 = 𝐶𝑝𝑒 − 𝐶𝑝𝑖 𝐴𝑝𝑧 [cl. 6.2.1 of IS 875 part-3]

Where, 𝐶𝑝𝑒 = External pressure coefficient (cl. 6.2.2 of IS 875 part-3)

𝐶𝑝𝑖 = Internal pressure coefficient (cl. 6.2.3 of IS 875 part-3)

A = Surface area of structural element

INTRODUCTION TO
CONNECTIONS

1
Fabrication of structures between following
members:

• Beam & column

• Beam & beam
• Beam & cross beam
• Column & column
• Column & brackets
• Column & caps
• Base plate of trusses
• Truss member connections through gussets
• Purlins & rafter
• Wind braces and columns
• Rails & columns
2
• Stiffeners in plate girders
• Diaphragms in plate girders
• Flange and web connections in plate girders
• Stiffener plates in column joints

Methods of Fabrications:
Rivet Joints
Bolt Joints
Weld Joints
The combinations of two or three of the above

3
 Requirements of good connection

1. It should be rigid enough to avoid fluctuating

stresses which may cause fatigue failure.
2. It should be such that there is the least possible
weakening of the parts to be joined.
3. It should be such that it can be easily installed,
inspected, & maintained.

4
RIVET CONNECTION
Rivet Head
Head Diameter

Shank

Nominal Diameter

5
Advantages of Riveted connections
 Ease of riveting process.
 Rivet connection is permanent in nature
 Cheaper fabrication cost.
 Low maintenance cost.
 Dissimilar metals can also be joined, even non-metallic joints
are possible with riveted joints.
 Rivet connection is possible without electricity in remote area
 Disadvantages of Rivet Connection:
(i) Necessity of pre-heating the rivets prior to driving
(ii) High level of noise
(iii)Skilled work necessary for inspection of connection
(iv)Cost involved in careful inspection and removal of poorly
installed rivets
(v)Labor cost is high

7
 Rivet

Power driven riveting Hand driven riveting

or Hot rivet or Cold rivet

Power driven shop Hand driven

rivet(PDS) shop rivet(HDS)

Power driven Hand driven field

field rivet(PDF) rivet(HDF)
8
 Commonly used rivet head

1.6d 2d

0.7d 0.25d

Length Length

d
d
Snap Head
Flat head

9
 Assumption:
1. Friction between the plates is neglected.
2. The shear stress is uniform on the cross section of
the rivet.
3. The distribution of direct stress on the portion of the
plates between the rivet holes is uniform.
4. Rivets in group subjected to direct loads share the
load equally.
5. Bending stress in the rivet is neglected.
6. Rivets fill completely the holes in which they are
driven
7. Bearing stress distribution is uniform and contact
area is d × t
10
BOLT CONNECTION
Clause 2.4: Bolts, nuts
and washers shall
conform as
appropriate to:
IS 1363-1967, IS 1364-
1967, IS 1367-1967, IS
3640-1967, IS 3757-
1972, IS 6623-1972 and
IS 6639-1972
Advantages:
• Less Manpower
• High strength bolts are much stronger than
rivet. Hence, bolted connections need less
fasteners than rivet joints
• Bolting operation is much faster
• Bolting operation is very silent in contrast to
hammering noise in riveting
• Bolting is a cold process; No risk of fire

• Bolt can be removed, replaced or retightened

easily in the event of faulty bolting or
damaged bolts due to accidents/hazards
 Disadvantages:
• Bolted connections have lesser strength in
axial tension as the net area at the root of
the threads is less

• Under vibratory loads, the strength is reduced

if the connections get loosened

• Unfinished bolts have lesser strength because

of non uniform diameter

• Architectural look
TYPES OF BOLT
• According to material and strength
(i) Ordinary structural bolt
(ii) High strength steel bolt
• According to Type of Shank
(i) Unfinished or black bolt
(ii) Turned bolt
(iii) High strength friction grip (HSFG) bolt
• According to pitch and fit of thread
(i) Standard pitch bolt
(ii) Fine pitch bolt
(iii) Coarse pitch bolt
• According to shape of head and nut
(i) Square bolt
(ii) Hexagonal bolt
 Terminology

Pitch, p  Pitch is the centre to centre distance of adjacent rivets or bolt holes
measured in the direction of stress.
Minimum pitch: 2.5 d (clause 10.2.2)
To prevent bearing failure between two bolts
Sufficient space to tighten bolts
16
 Terminology
Maximum pitch: Desirable to place bolts sufficiently closed (clause 10.2.3)
(1) To reduce length of connection and gusset plate
(2) To have uniform stress
(Distance between two consecutive bolts) < 16 t or 200 mm in tension
< 12 t or 200 mm in compression
(Distance between two adjacent bolts) < 32 t or 300 mm

Gauge, g  A row of rivets which is parallel to the direction of stress is called

gauge line. The normal distance between two adjacent gauge lines is called
gauge.

Edge distance, e  The distance between the edge of a member or cover plate
from the centre of the nearest rivet/bolt hole.

Minimum edge distance for rivet: 1.5 d

17
 Nominal diameter, d It is the diameter of the shank of the
rivet. For bolts the diameter of the unthreaded portion of the
shank is called its nominal diameter.

Gross diameter, D The diameter of the rivet hole or bolt

hole is called its gross diameter.

For rivet:
As per clause 3.6.1.1 of IS 800:1984
D = d + 1.5 mm for d < 25mm
= d + 2 mm for d 25mm

18
 For Bolt:

Minimum and maximum edge distance and end distance are given in
clause 10.2.4.2 and 10.2.4.3

The minimum edge/end distances > 1.7 times the hole diameter
(In case of sheared or hand-flame cut edges)
> 1.5 times the hole diameter
(In case of rolled, machine-flame cut, sawn and planed edges.)

The maximum edge distance < 12tε where ε = (250/f y)1/2

(t is the thickness of the thinner plate)
Bolt holes:
Bolt holes are required to facilitate the insertion of bolts to make
connection between steel members. Bolt holes are usually made
larger than the nominal diameter of bolt to smooth the progress of
erection and accommodate minor discrepancies.

Bolt hole = bolt diameter + clearances of hole (Clause 10.2.1, Table 19)

Diameter, d Standard clearance Over size Short slot Long short

12-14 1 3 4 2.5 d
16-22 2 4 6 2.5 d
24 2 6 8 2.5 d
>24 3 8 10 2.5 d
 INTRODUCTION TO
BOLT CONNECTIONS

1
 TYPES OF JOINTS

(i) Depending upon arrangement of bolts& plates

(ii) Depending upon mode of load transmission
(iii)Depending upon nature and location of load

2
 TYPES OF BOLT JOINTS
(i) Depending upon arrangement of bolts and plates

Lap Joint
Single line bolting
Chain bolting
Staggered or zig-zag bolting

Butt Joint
Single bolting
Chain bolting
Staggered or zig-zag bolting

3
Bolting pattern

Chain bolting

Zig-Zag bolting

Diamond bolting
(i) Depending upon arrangement of bolts and plates
Single bolted Lap Joint:

Triple bolted lap joint:

Single bolted single cover butt joint:

Single bolted double cover butt joint

Double bolted double cover butt joint

5
 TYPES OF BOLT JOINTS
(ii) Depending upon the mode of load transmission

(a)Single shear
(b)Double shear
(c) Multiple shear

6
(ii) Depending upon the mode of load transmission

(a) Single shear

(b) Double shear

(c) Multiple shear

7
 TYPES OF BOLT JOINTS
(iii) Depending upon nature and location of load

(a) Direct shear connection

(b)Eccentric connection
(c) Pure moment connection
(d) Moment shear connection

8
(a) Direct shear connection

9
(b) Eccentric connection

10
(c) Pure moment connection

11
(d) Moment shear connection

12
The following are the failure modes of a bolted joint:

•Shear failure of the bolt

•Bearing failure of the bolt

•Tensile failure of bolt

•Shear failure of the plate

•Bearing failure of the plate

•Tensile failure of plate

Shear Failure of Bolt

(a) Single shear

(b) Double shear

14
Things to remember for bolted connections:
•Stress concentration results in a considerable decrement
in the tensile strength.

•Loose fit of the joint can reduce the stiffness which may
result in excessive deflections.

•Vibrations can cause loosening of nuts which can

jeopardize the safety of structure.
 Criteria for designing bolted joints with
axially loaded members

• The length of joint should be as small as possible to

save material on cover plates and gusset plates.

• The center line of all the members meeting at a joint

should coincide at one point only. Otherwise the joint will
twist out of position.

• The number of bolts should be increased gradually

towards the joint for uniform stress distribution in bolts .
Criteria for designing bolted joints with
axially loaded members

• The arrangement should satisfy the pitch, gauge and edge

distance requirements.

• The strength of joint reduces due to the bolt holes. The

reduction in area due to bolt holes can be minimized by
arranging in a zig-zag form.
 D E

C
A

B
 Design of
Fillet Welds
Design strength of fillet weld
The design strength of fillet weld is calculated on its throat area.
f u Lw te
Pd w =
3 γmw

Lw = length of weld in mm
fu = ultimate stress of weld in MPa
te = effective throat thickness = 0.7S
γmw = partial safety factor
= 1.25 for shop welding and
= 1.5 for site welding
S = size of weld in mm
Example:
A tie member of a roof truss consists of ISA 100×75×8 of Fe410
grade, is welded to a 10 mm gusset plate. Design the welded
connection to transmit a tensile load, T. Assume connection are made
in the workshop.

Lw1
10 mm

100 T

Lw2

10 mm gusset plate ISA 100 × 75 × 8

Solution : Minimum weld size = 3 mm [Table 21, IS 800]
3
Maximum weld size =  8  6mm [clause 10.5.8.2, IS 800]
4
Therefore, Let us adopt 5 mm thick fillet weld.
Throat thickness, t e  0.7  5  3.5 m m

For ISA 100×75×8, Gross area, Ag = 1336mm2 , Cz = 31mm

f y Ag 250 × 1336
Full strength of the angle 10
3

γm0 1.1
303.64 kN
3.5  410
Strength of 5-mm weld =  662.8 N / m m
3  1.25
Force to resist by weld at 100 mm side of angle,
3
P2  662.8  100  10  66.28 kN

Force to resist by weld at upper side of angle,

Ty P2 303.64  31 66.28
P1      61kN
d 2 100 2

Force to resist by weld at lower side of angle,

P3  T  P1  P2  303.64  61  66.28  176.36 kN

61  10
3

Length required at upper side of angle, L w1   92 m m

662.8

176.36  10
3

Length required at upper side of angle, Lw 3   266m m

662.8
Total Length (effective) of weld = 266 + 92+100 = 458 mm
Note: Add twice the weld size at the ends.
Thus total length = 458+2S = 468 mm
Example. Design a suitable fillet weld to connect web plate to flange
plate and flange plate to flange cover plate of a built-up girder as
shown in the figure, for the following data. Assume shop welding.
Web plate: 1200 mm × 12 mm
Flange plate: 450 mm × 20 mm
Flange cover plate: 350 mm × 16 mm
Maximum Factored shear force: 1600 kN
 450 mm

350 mm

16 mm
20 mm

1200/2=600 mm

12 mm

Centroidal axis
Solution: For Fe 410 steel: f u  410 M Pa

For shop weld:  m w  1.25

fu 410
Permissible shear stress    189.37 N / m m
2

3   mw 3  1.25

Connection of web plate to flange plate:

Size of weld: Minimum = 5 mm [Table 21, IS 800]

Maximum = 12 – 1.5 =10.5 mm [clause 10.5.8.1, IS 800]
Let us provide 7 mm size of fillet weld.
Effective throat thickness of weld t e  K S  0.7  7  4.9 m m
 t e  2  4.9  9.8 m m
A y  450  20  (600  10)  350  16  (600  20  8)

 900.68  10 m m
4 3
 350  16 450  20 12  1200
3 3 3

I zz  2  [  350  16  628   450  20  610 ] 

2 2

12 12 12
 12.8  10 m m
9 4

1600  10  (900.68  10 )
3 4
VAy
Shear stress:   114.9 N / m m  189.37 N / m m
2 2

I zz   t e 12.8  10  9.8
9

Hence, the weld is safe.

Connection of flange plate to flange cover plate:
Adopt a 7 mm fillet weld.
t e  K S  0.7  7  4.9 m m
 t e  2  4.9  9.8 m m
Ay  350  16  (600  20  8)  351.68  10 mm
4 3

1600  10  (351.68  10 )
3 4
VAy
Shear stress:   44.86 N / m m  189.37 N / m m
2 2

I zz   t e 12.8  10  9.8
9

Hence, the weld is safe.

 Design of
Ordinary Black Bolts
Types of Bolted Connections

(i) Bearing Type Bolt

(Clause 10.3)
(i) Friction Type Bolt
(Clause 10.4)

(i) Lap Joints

(ii) Butt Joints

 Design of Ordinary Black Bolts

1. Shearing strength of bolts

2. Bearing strength of bolts
3. Tensile strength of bolts
4. Tensile strength of plate
5. Combined shear and tension
 Design of Ordinary Black Bolts (Clause 10.3)
f ub
1) Bolts in Shear V nsb n n Anb n s A sb lj lg pkg
3
Vnsb = nominal capacity of bolts in shear
fub = ultimate tensile strength of bolts
nn = no. of shear planes with threads intercepting the plane
ns = no. of shear planes without threads intercepting the
plane
βlj = reduction factor which allows for overloading of end
bolts that occur in long connections
βlg = reduction factor for large grip lengths
βpkg = reduction factor for packing plates thicker than 6mm
Anb = net tensile area of bolt to be considered at the root of
the threads = 0.78×π×d2/4
Asb = nominal plain shank area of the bolt;
Threads excluded from shear plane

Threads included in shear plane

 V dsb V nsb mb

Vdsb = design shear force

γmb = partial safety factor for the material of bolt = 1.25

Reduction Factor for Long Joints

If length of joint lj > 15d, where d = nominal diameter of

bolts,

then βlj = 1.075 – lj/ (200d), 0.75 ≤ βlj ≤ 1.0

Reduction Factor for Large Grip Length

If total thickness of connected plates lg > 5d, then βlg = 8d/

(3 + lg)
Note: βlg < βlj and lg < 8d

Reduction Factor for Packing Plates

If thickness of packing plates tpkg > 6mm, then
βpkg = 1 – 0.0125tpkg
2) Bolts in Bearing
V npb 2.5 k b dt f u

Vnpb = nominal bearing strength of bolt

fu = ultimate tensile stress of plate

d = nominal diameter of bolt

t = summation of thickness of connected plates

experiencing bearing stress in same direction
 e p
kb = smaller of , 0.25, f ub f u ,1
3d 0 3d 0
fub = ultimate tensile stress of bolts

d0 = diameter of bolt hole

p = pitch of fastener along bearing direction

e = edge distance
V dpb V npb mb

Vdpb = design shear force

γmb = partial safety factor = 1.25

3) Bolts in Tension
mb
Tnb 0.9 f ub Anb f yb Asb
m0
Tnb = nominal capacity of a bolt in tension
fub = ultimate tensile stress of bolts
An = net tensile stress area
Asb = shank area of bolt
fyb = yield stress of bolt
γm0 = partial safety factor = 1.1
γm1 = partial safety factor = 1.25

T db T nb mb

Tdb = design tensile force

γmb = partial safety factor = 1.25

4) Tension Capacity of Plate

0.9 f u An
Where An b nd 0 t T nd
m1
Tnd = tension capacity of plate

fu = ultimate tensile stress of plate

An = net effective area of plate

γml = partial safety factor = 1.25

b = width of plate

n = number of holes along width perpendicular to the direction of load

d0 = hole diameter

t = thickness of plate
5) Bolts with combined Shear and Tension
2 2
V Te
1.0
V sd T nd

V = applied shear force

Vsd = design shear capacity

Te = externally applied tension

Tnd = design tension capacity

6) Strength of Solid Plate
0.9 f u Asp
T sp
m1

where Asp = b×t

b = width of plate
t = thickness of plate
fu = ultimate tensile stress of plate
γm1 = partial safety factor = 1.25

Efficiency of Joint
stre n g th o f jo in t p e r p itch le n g th
100
stre n g th o f so lid p la te p e r p itch le n g th
 Example: Calculate the shear strength of 16 mm diameter
bolt of grade 4.6. The bolt is under triple shear as shown
in the figure below.

f ub
Solution: V dsb 3
n n Anb n s A sb lj lg pkg
mb
nn = no. of shear planes with threads intercepting the plane =1
ns = no. of shear planes without threads intercepting the plane
=2
Nominal diameter of bolt, d =16 mm
Diameter of hole, d 0  18 mm (Ref. Table 19)
For grade 4.6 bolts; f ub  400 M Pa

For Fe 410 grade of steel; f u  410 M Pa

Partial safety factor for bolt,  m b  1.25
For 16 mm diameter bolt;

Net shear area of bolt at threads is, Anb  0.78   d 2  157 m m 2
 4
And Ans   d  201 m m
2 2

4
Thus, f ub 400 3
V dsb n n Anb n s A sb 1 157 2 201 103 10 N
3 mb
3 1.25

Therefore, the design shear strength, Vdsb = 103 kN

Worked out Examples
on Design of
Ordinary Black Bolts
Example: Design the following joints using ordinary black bolts between two
plates of width 200 mm and thicknesses 10 mm and 18 mm respectively to
transmit a factored load of 150 kN.

a) Lap joint
b) Single cover butt joint with cover plate of 8 mm.
c) Double cover butt joint with 8 mm covers plates.
Use plates made of Fe 410 grade steel and 16 mm diameter bolt of grade
4.6.
Example: Design the following joints between two plates of width 200 mm
and thicknesses 10 mm and 18 mm respectively to transmit a factored load
of 150 kN.

a) Lap joint
b) Single cover butt joint with cover plate of 8 mm.
c) Double cover butt joint with 8 mm covers plates.
Use plates made of Fe 410 grade steel and 16 mm diameter bolt of grade
4.6.
Solution: Nominal diameter of bolt, d  1 6 m m
Diameter of hole, d 0  18 mm (Ref. Table 19)
For grade 4.6 bolts; f ub  400 M Pa
For Fe 410 grade of steel; f u  410 M Pa
Partial safety factor for bolt,  m b  1.25
a) Lap joint:
The bolts will be in single shear.
n  1 ns  0
Assuming threads in the shear plane, n ;
For 16 mm diameter bolt; Net shear area of the bolt at threads is,
Anb  157 m m
2
 f ub
Design shear strength per bolt , V dsb   n n Anb  n s A sb 
3   mb
3
400  10
 1  157  0   29 kN
3  1.25

Minimum pitch, p  2.5 d  2.5  16  40

Minimum end distance, e = 1.5 d0 (for rolled edge) =1.5×18=27 mm
= 1.7 d0 (for hand-flame cut edge) = 1.7×18=30.6 mm
Provide p=50 mm and e= 31 mm
2.5  k b  d  t  f u
Design bearing strength per bolt, V dpb 
 mb

kb is smaller of 31/(3×18), 50/(3×18)-0.25, 400/410, 1

Kb = 0.57
 3
2.5  0.57  16  10  410  10 kN
V dpb 
1.25

= 74.78 kN
Therefore, bolt value = 29 kN.
Number of bolts required = 150/6 = 5.2
Provide 6 bolts.
Arrange the bolts in two lines.
18mm Direction of load
10mm 150 kN

31mm

138mm 200 mm

31mm
b) Single cover butt joint:
50mm 50mm

The bolts also will be in single shear.

So V dsb  29 kN
 2.5  k b  d  t  f u
Design bearing strength per bolt, V dpb 
 mb
p = 50 mm, e = 31 mm, Kb = 0.57, t = 8 mm
3
2.5  0.57  16  8  410  10
V dpb 
1.25
=59.83 kN

Therefore the bolt value is 29 kN. 150

Number of bolts required for this connection   5.1
29

Provide 6 bolts and arranging it in three lines.

Direction of load
18mm 10mm
150 kN

31mm

69mm
69mm 200 mm

31mm

50mm
c) Double cover butt joint:
The bolts will be in double shear.
Assuming threads in the shear planes. Therefore n n  2 ; n s  0
Since the two plates of thicknesses 18 mm and 10 mm are to be jointed,
packing plate of thickness (18-10) = 8 mm will be required.
As per clause 10.3.3.3 of IS:800 2007,
Design shear capacity of bolts will be decreased by factor  pk
 pkg  (1  0.0125 t pkg )
 (1  0 .0 1 2 5  8)
 0 .9
f ub
Design strength of bolt in double shear, V dsb  ( n n Anb  n s A sb )  pk
3   mb
3
400  10
  2  157  0.9
3  1.25
= 52.21 kN
Design bearing strength per bolt, 2.5  k b  d  t  f u
V dpb 
 mb
p = 65 mm, e = 31 mm, Kb = 0.57, t = 10 mm
3
2.5  0.57  16  10  410  10
V dpb 
1.25
=74.78 kN
Therefore the bolt value is 52.21 kN.
150
Number of bolts required for this connection  2.87
52.21

Using 4 bolts to arrange the joint as single bolted double cover butt joint.
8mm cover plates
Direction of load
18mm 10mm
150 kN

Packing plate(8mm)
31mm

138mm 200 mm

31mm

65mm
Example: Two plates 10 mm thick are joined by 16mm diameter bolts in
a triple staggered lap joint. Find efficiency of the joint.

18

10
10

1-1 2-2 3-3

25
20
20
20
20

25

40
dh = 16+2=18mm
fu 400
n n Anb n s A sb 1 157 0
Psingle shear = V dsb
3 3
29.0 kN
mb
1.25

Pbearing V dpb 2 .5 k b d tf u mb

e p
kb = smaller of , 0.25, f ub f u ,1
3d g 3d g

Here, e = 25 mm, p=40mm

kb = 25/(3×18), 40/(3×18)-0.25, 400/410, 1

kb = 0.46
 2.5 0.46 16 10 410
Pbearing 60.35 K N
1.25

Bolt value = 29.0 KN

Strength of joint based on bolt value = 7×29.0 = 203 KN

Strength of joint along 1-1 0.9 f u b nd h t ml

= 10-3 × 0.9×410×(130-2×18)×10/1.25 = 277.49 KN

Strength of joint along 2-2 0.9 f u b nd h t ml

2 Bv
= 10-3 × 0.9×410×(130-3×18)×10/1.25 + 2×29
= 282.35 KN

Strength of joint along 3-3 0.9 f u b nd h t m l 5 B v

= 10-3 × 0.9×410×(130-2×18)×10/1.25 + 5×29
= 422.49 KN
Strength of joint = 203 KN

Strength of solid plate 0.9 f u b t ml

= 0.9×410×130×10/1.25

=383.75 KN
203
Efficiency, 100 52.9%
383.75
Design of High Strength
Friction Grip Bolts
1) Shear strength of HSFG Bolts

V nsf f
n e K h F0

Vnsf = nominal shear capacity of bolt

µf = coefficient of friction Ref. Clause 10.4.3, Table 20

Kh = 1.0 for fasteners in clearance holes

= 0.85 for fasteners in oversized and short slotted holes and long slotted
holes loaded perpendicular to the slots

= 0.7 for fasteners in long slotted holes loaded parallel to the slots

ne = number of effective interfaces offering frictional resistance to slip

F0 = proof load = Anbf0

f0 = proof stress = 0.7 fub

Anb = net area of bolts at threads

fub Ultimate tensile stress in bolt

V dsf V nsf mf

Vdsf = design shear force

γmf = partial safety factor

= 1.1 if slip resistance is designed at service load

= 1.25 if slip resistance is designed at ultimate load

Reduction Factor for Long Joints

If length of joint lj > 15d, where d = nominal diameter of

bolts,

then βlj = 1.075 – lj/ (200d), 0.75 ≤ βlj ≤ 1.0

Vnsf is reduced by a factor βlj

2) Bolts in Bearing

V npb 2.5 k b dtf u

Vnpb = nominal bearing strength of bolt

fu = ultimate tensile stress

d = nominal diameter of bolt

t = summation of thickness of connected plates

experiencing bearing stress in same direction
 e p
kb = smaller of , 0.25, f ub f u ,1
3d 0 3d 0

fub = ultimate tensile stress of bolts

d0 = diameter of bolt hole

p = pitch of fastener along bearing direction

e = edge distance
V dsb V npb mb

Vdsb = design shear force

γmb = partial safety factor = 1.25

 m1
3) Bolts in Tension Tnf 0.9 f ub Anb f yb Asb
m0

Tnf = design tensile strength of bolt

fub = ultimate tensile stress of bolts
Anb = net tensile stress area of bolt
Asb = shank area of bolt
fyb = yield stress of bolt
γm0 = partial safety factor = 1.1
γm1 = partial safety factor = 1.25

T df T nf mb

Tdf = design tensile force

γmb = partial safety factor = 1.25

4) Bolts with combined Shear and Tension
2 2
V sf Tf
1.0
V sdf T sdf

Vsf = applied shear force at service load

Vsdf = design shear capacity

Tf = externally applied tension at service load

Tsdf = design tension capacity

5) Prying forces
(Clause 10.4.7)

4
lv f 0 be t
Q Te 2
2 le 27 l e l v

Q = additional force of fastener due to prying action

lv = distance from bolt centre line to toe of fillet weld or to

half the root radius of a rolled section

le = distance between prying force and bolt centre line

 le 1.1t f0 f y

β = 2 for non pre-tensioned bolts

1 for pre-tensioned bolts

η = 1.5

f0 = proof stress

t = thickness of end plate

t m in 4.4 M p
f y be

where Mp = Telv/2 = Qle

Example:
An ISA 110 mm ×110 mm ×10 mm carries a factored tensile force of 150
kN. It is to be jointed with a 10 mm thick gusset plate. Design the joint
using HSFG bolt when (a) no slip is permitted, (b) when slip is permitted.
Assume steel is Fe 410 grade.

Solution:
Let us provide HSFG bolts of grade 8.8 and of diameter 20 mm.

For 8.8 grade bolts: f ub  800 M Pa


Net tensile stress area of bolt, Anb  0.78   20  245 m m
2 2

4
For Fe 410 grade of steel: f u  410 M Pa
(a) Slip-critical connection (slip is not permitted ):
3
proof load, F0  Anb  0.7 f ub  245  0.7  800  10  137.2 kN

Slip resistance of bolt   f n e k h F0 /  m f

here,  f = 0.5 (assuming)

n e = number of effective interfaces offering frictional resistance to slip
=1
 m f = 1.25 at ultimate load

k h = 1.0 (assuming bolts in clearance holes)

137.2
Slip resistance of bolt  0.5  1  1   54.88 kN
1.25

150
Number of bolts required   2.73
54.87
Thus provide 3 nos. HSFG bolts.
(b) Bearing type connection: (slip is permitted )
Strength of bolt in single shear,

Anb f ub 245  800 3

V dsb    10  90.53 kN
3 m b 3  1.25

Strength of bolt in bearing, 2.5 k b dtf u

V dpb 
 mb
Assume e = 40 mm [Minimum e = 1.7d0 = 37.4 mm]
p = 60 mm [Minimum p = 2.5d = 50 mm]

kb is smaller of 40/(3×22) , 60/(3×22) - 0.25 , 400/410, 1

Therefore, kb = 0.61
3
So, 2.5  0.61  20  10  410  10
V dpb   100.04 kN
1.25
Hence, strength of bolt = 90.53 kN
Number of bolts required 150
  1.66
Thus provide 2 HSFG bolts 90.53
WELD CONNECTION
Welding is the process of connecting metal pieces by application
of heat (i.e. fusion) with or without pressure.

Types of Welding Process

•Forge Welding
•Thermit Welding
•Gas Welding
•Resistance Welding
•Electric-arc Welding
Advantages of weld connections

1. As no hole is required for welding, hence no reduction of area. So,

structural members are more effective in taking the load.

2. In welding, filler plates, gusseted plates, connecting angles etc.

are not used, which leads to reduced overall weight of the
structure.

3. Welded joints are more economical as less material is required.

4. The efficiency of welded joints is more than that of the

riveted/bolted joints.

5. The welded joint look better than the bulky riveted/bolted joints
Advantages of welding
6. The speed of fabrication is faster in comparison with the riveted
joints.

7. Complete rigid joints can be provided with welding process.

8. The alteration & addition to the existing structure is easy as

compare to rivet joints.

9. No noise is produced during the welding process as in the case of

riveting.

10. The welding process requires less work space in comparison to

riveting.

11. Any shape of joint can be made with ease.

Disadvantages of welding joints
• Welded joints are brittle & therefore their fatigue strength is less
than the members joined.

• Due to uneven heating & cooling of the members during the

welding, the members may distort resulting in additional stresses.

• Skilled labor & electricity are required for welding

• No provision for expansion & contraction is kept in welded

connection & therefore, there is possibility of cracks.

• The inspection of welding work is more difficult & costlier than

the riveting work.

• Defects like internal air pocket, slag inclusion & incomplete

penetration are difficult to detect.
Types of Welds
Classified according to their formations:

• Fillet Weld

• Butt Weld

• Plug Weld
 Basic types of welds and their symbols

Form of weld Section Symbol

Fillet

Square butt

Single-V-butt
Basic types of welds and their symbols

Double-V-butt

Single-U-butt

Double-U-butt

Single-bevel-
butt
Basic types of welds and their symbols

Double -bevel-
butt

Single-J-butt

Double-J-butt
Shape of weld Symbol
Flat
Convex
Concave
Fillet welding
When two lapped plates are to be joined fillet welding is
used.
Design of Fillet Welds
Few terms are used while designing a fillet weld:

1. Size of fillet weld

2. Throat of fillet weld
3. Effective length of the fillet weld
4. End return
5. Overlap
6. Side fillet
7. Intermittent fillet weld
8. Single fillet weld
9. Permissible stress & strength of fillet weld
Size of Fillet weld

Toe
Weld face

Toe
Fusion Zone

Leg
Root
1. Size of the weld :

The sides containing the right angle of the fillet weld

are called legs. The size of the weld is specified by
the minimum leg length. The length is the distance
from the root of the weld to the toe of the weld,
measured along the fusion face.
Table: Minimum size of first run or single run fillet weld
(Clause 10.5.2.3; Table 21)

Thickness of thicker part Minimum size of

Weld (mm)
Over (mm) Up to and
Including(mm)
- 10 3
10 20 5
20 32 6
32 50 8 of first run
10 for minimum size
of weld
Note :
1. When the minimum size of the fillet weld is greater than the
thickness of the thinner part, the minimum size of the weld should
be taken as the thickness of the thinner part.
2. When the thicker part is more than 50 mm thick, special
precaution like preheating etc. will have to be taken.

As per Clause 10.5.2.1 of IS 800:2007 for deep penetration welds,

where the depth of penetration beyond the root run is a minimum
of 2.4 mm, the size of the fillet weld is minimum leg size plus 2.4
mm.
The maximum size of the fillet weld
= Thickness of the thinner plate – 1.5mm
= ¾ of nominal thickness of angle
Effective throat thickness
The effective throat thickness of a fillet weld is the
perpendicular distance from the root to the hypotenuse joining
the two ends of the legs, while reinforcement is neglected.

BA  BC  S A
 AC  2S
D
AB  AD  BD
2 2 2
S
T
 BD  AB  AD
2 2
B
2 S C
 S  S
 BD  S    BD 
2

 2 2

 BD  T  0.707S  0.7S
 For the angle other than right-angled fillet weld the value of
throat thickness is given as:

T = KS

Where,
T = Throat thickness of weld
KA constant depends upon the angle between fusion face
S Thickness of the weld

Effective throat thickness shall not be less than 3 mm and generally

not exceeding 0.7t or 1.0t under special circumstances where t is the
thickness of the thinner plate(Clause 10.5.3.1 of IS 800)
Values of K for different angles between fusion faces
(Table 22 of IS 800:2007, Clause 10.5.3.2)

Angle between Constant, K

fusion face

600-900 0.7
910-1000 0.65
1010-1060 0.6
1070-1130 0.55
1140-1200 0.5
Effective length of fillet: - The effective length of the fillet
weld is the area of the weld for which the specified size & the
effective throat thickness of the weld exist.

Effective length (l) = Overall length (L) – 2S

The effective length should not be less than four times the size
of the weld. Otherwise size of the weld must be taken as the
one fourth of the effective weld length.

i.e.
Design strength of fillet weld
The design strength of fillet weld is calculated on its throat area.
f u Lw te
Pd w =
3 γmw

Lw = length of weld in mm
fu = ultimate stress of weld in MPa
te = effective throat thickness = 0.7S
γmw = partial safety factor
= 1.25 for shop welding and
= 1.5 for site welding
S = size of weld in mm
 Design Procedure
1. Assume size of weld based on thickness of members to be joined.

2. By equating design strength of weld to external factored load,

effective length of weld is calculated. If length exceeds 150te, reduce
design capacity of weld as prescribed in clause 10.5.7.3 and is as
given below.

The design strength of weld will be reduced by a factor as follows.

0.2l j
lw
= 1.2 -
150t e
Where, lj = length of joint in the direction of force transfer
te = throat thickness of the weld.

3. End returns of length equal to twice the size of weld are provided
at each end of longitudinal fillet weld.
End return:
The fillet weld terminating
at the end or side of a
member should be
returned around the
corner whenever
practicable for a distance
not less than twice the
weld size as shown in the
figure:

Overlap
The overlap of a lap joint should not be less than four times the
thickness of the thinner plate or 40 mm which ever is more.
Design of Butt Welds
Butt / Groove welding
Butt weld is used when the plates to be joined are in the same plane or when T
joint is desired.
Butt welding
A butt weld is specified by the size of the weld. Size is defined by the
effective throat thickness.

Specification:

1. Size of the weld

2. Effective length of the butt weld

3. Effective area of the butt weld

4. Reinforcements
1. Size of the weld
Size of the weld is specified by the effective throat thickness
as follows:

(a) The size of the butt weld is the thickness of the thinner plate.
(b) The effective throat thickness in case of complete penetration
is taken as the thickness of the thinner part.
Double-V, Double-U, Double-J & Double Bevel butt joints are the
examples of completely penetrated butt weld.
(c) In case of incomplete penetration of butt weld the effective
throat thickness is taken as the 7/8th of the thickness of the
thinner part. But for purpose of stress calculation the effective
throat thickness should not exceed 5/8th of the thickness of the
thinner part.

(d)The difference in thickness between the two plates should

not be more than 25% of the thickness or 3mm whichever is
more.

(e) If difference is more than 25% tapering less than 1 in 5 is

to be done.
2. The effective length of the butt weld

It is the area of the butt weld for which the specified size (i.e. the
throat thickness) of the weld exists.

The effective length should not be less than four times the size
of the weld. Otherwise size of the weld must be taken as the
one fourth of the effective weld length.

i.e.

Note:- In drawing only effective lengths are shown, the

welder must provide an additional length of 2S to get the
overall depth.
Reinforcements :
Reinforcement is the extra weld metal
which make the throat dimension at least
10% greater than the thickness of the
weld material. The extra deposit of
metals above the thinner plate between 1
mm to 3 mm is not considered for stress
calculation or design. The reinforcement
is provided to increase the efficiency of
the joint.

Stress in the butt weld : The stresses of the butt weld should be taken
equal to the stresses of the parent metal in the case of shop weld.

These values are reduced to 80% in case of field weld.

Design strength of butt weld
The design strength of butt weld in tension or compression is
governed by yield f y Lw te
T dw =
γmw
Lw = effective length of weld in mm
fy = smaller of yield stress of weld and parent material in MPa
te = effective throat thickness in mm
γmw = partial safety factor
= 1.25 for shop welding and
= 1.5 for site welding

The design strength of butt weld in shear is also governed by yield

f y Lw te
Vdw =
3 γmw
Stresses due to individual forces

When subjected to either compressive or tensile due to axial force

or shear force alone, the stress in the weld is given by
P
fa o r q 
t e lw

Where,
fa = calculated normal stress due to axial force in N/mm2
q = shear stress in N/mm2
P = force transmitted (axial force N or shear force Q)
t e = effective throat thickness of weld in mm
l w= effective length of weld in mm
Combination of stresses
Fillet welds
While subjected to a combination of normal stress (due to axial
tension/compression or bending tension/compression) and shear
stresses, the equivalent stress fe should satisfy the following

2 2 fu
fe  f  3q
a

3  mw
Where,

fa = normal stress, compression or tension, due to axial force or

bending moment.
q= shear stress due to shear force or tension.
Combined bearing, Bending and shear
If bearing stress, (fbr) is combined with bending stress (fb)
(tensile or compressive) and shear stresses (q) under the most
unfavourable conditions of loading, the equivalent stress (fe) is
obtained from the following formula:

2 2 2
fe  f  f  f b f br  3 q
b br

fe = equivalent stress
fb = calculated stress due to bending in N/mm2
fbr = calculated stress due to bearing in N/mm2
q = shear stress in N/mm2
Example:
Two plates of thickness 12 mm and 10 mm are to be jointed by a
groove weld. The joint is subjected to a factored tensile force of 250
kN. Assuming an effective length of 150 mm, check the safety of the
joint for
a) Single-V groove weld joint and,
b) Double-V groove weld joint.
Assume Fe 410 grade steel plates and that the welds are shop welded.

12 mm 10 mm

Single-V groove weld

12 mm 10 mm

Double-V groove weld

(a) Single-V groove weld:
5 5
Throat thickness, te  t  10  6.25 m m
8 8
Effective length of weld, L w  150 m m

Lw te f y 150  6.25  250 3

Strength of weld=   10  187.5 kN  250 kN
 mw 1.25

Hence the joint is not safe.

(b) Double-V groove weld:

Throat thickness = thickness of thinner plate = 10 mm
Lw te f y 150  10  250 3
Strength of weld =   10  300 kN  250 kN
 mw 1.25

Hence, the joint is safe.

Example:
A joint is subjected to a factored shear force of 300 kN. Assuming
single-V groove weld joint find the effective length of the weld if the
thickness of thinner plate is 8 mm. Assume Fe 410 grade steel plates
and that the welds are shop welded.

Solution:

For single-V groove weld, effective throat thickness =

5 5
te  t  8  5 mm
8 8
3
3 γmw V dw 3 1.25 300 10
Length of the weld, L w 520 m m
fy te 250 5

Thus, the effective length of the weld will be 520 mm.

Design of Plug and Slot Weld
 Plug and Slot Weld

A slot is cut in one of the overlapping member and the welding

metal is filled in the slot.
If the slot is small and completely filled with weld metal, it is called
plug weld.
If the periphery of the slot is filled with weld metal, it is called as
slot weld.
Following specifications are for the design of plug or slot weld as
per IS816-1969:

1. The width or diameter of the slot should not be less than three
times the thickness of the part in which the slot is formed or 25
mm, whichever is greater
2. The distance between edge of the part and edge of slot or plug or
between adjacent slots or plugs should not less than 3 times
thickness of thinner member or 25mm, whichever is greater.

3. Corners at the enclosed ends should be rounded to a radius not

less than one and a half times the thickness of the upper plate or
12 mm which ever is greater.
The design shear stress on a plug or slot weld will be same as that
in fillet weld and is specified in 10.5.7.1.1 of IS 800:2007
Example: An ISMC 300 @ 363 N/mm is used to transmit factored
force 800 kN. The channel section is connected to a 12mm thick
gusset plate. Design a fillet weld connection if the overlap is limited
to 300 mm. Use slot welds if required. Assume site welding.
Solution
The properties of ISMC 300 are,
A= 4630 mm2 , tf = 13.6 mm , tw= 7.8 mm
maximum size of weld= 7.8 - 1.5 = 6.3 mm. (Cl. 10.5.8.1)
Minimum size of the weld = 3 mm (Table 21 IS 800:2007)
Adopt a 6-mm size weld.
Throat thickness = KS = 0.7 x 6 = 4.2 mm
fu
Strength of the weld per mm = t e
3  mw
= 4.2  410 / ( 3  1.5 )
= 663 N/mm
Required length of weld = 800  1000 / 663  1207m m

The maximum length of weld that can be provided in the

channel = 300  2  300  900m m  1207m m

Hence, use two slots welds of width 25 mm

( 3 t  3  7.8  23.4 or 25 mm whichever is greater

Assume the length of the slot weld is x mm, then,

1207  2  300  300  4 x
or, x  76.75 mm
Hence, provide 80 mm x 25 mm slots , two in numbers as
shown in the figure.
Example
A pipe of 100 mm diameter and 8 mm thick is connected
to a 16 mm thick plate with fillet weld. It is subjected to
a vertical factored load of 10 kN at a distance of 0.5 m
from the welded end. It is also subjected to a factored
twisting moment of 3 kNm. Find the size of the weld
assuming shop welding and steel of grade to be Fe410
Solution:
Here, fu = 410 MPa , ymw = 1.25
fu 410
Permissible shear stress = = =189.37 N/mm2
3×γmw 3×1.25
Hence, P = 10 kN
M = P. e = 10 x 0.5 = 5 kNm
T = 3 kNm
Polar moment of inertia, Ip = 2πr3 ×t = 2π×503 ×t
= 785398t mm4
Izz= Ip/2 = 392699t mm4
3
P 10×10
(1) Shear stress due to direct load, q1 = =
2πrt 2×π×50×t
31.83
= N/mm2
t
 T
(2) Shear stress due to twisting moment, q2 = ×r
Ip

6
3×10 ×50 191
= = N/mm2
785398t t
M
(3) Normal stress due to bending, fa= ×r
Izz
6
5×10 636.62
= ×50 = N/mm2
392699t t

Resultant shear stress, 𝑞 = 𝑞1 2 + 𝑞2 2

31.83 2 191 2 193.6

= + = N/mm2
t t t
Equivalent stress due to normal and shear stress,

636.62 2 3×193.6 2 861.75

fe = fa 2 +3q2 = + = N/mm2
t t t
fu
fe ≤ = 189.37
3 ×γmw

861.75
≤ 189.37
t

So, t = 4.55 mm

t
Hence, s = = 6.4 ≈ 7 mm
0.707
So, the size of the weld will be 7 mm.
ECCENTRIC CONNECTION
Load lying in plane of bolted joint
Load lying in plane of bolted joint
Analysis
• Acting shear force (P) is replace by a Force acting through the
centroid of the bolt group and a moment (M=P×e) where e is
the eccentricity of the load

P
(passing through centroid)
P
e

M=Pe
Load lying in plane of bolted joint
If, Direct load =P, Bending moment, M = Pe
Therefore, Direct axial shear, Fa = P/n
Where
n No of bolts in the group
Fa Force on each bolt due to axial load

Fa Fm Fa Fm

+ =

Direct Force Combined direct

Moment Force & moment
Again, Rotational shear or shear due to moment on each bolts,
Fm  r
Where,
r  Radial distance of the bolts from the CG of the group
Fm
 Fm  kr  k  Here k Proportionality constant
r
Moment due to Fm in each bolt = (kr).r = kr2
Hence, the total moment will be:
F r    kr  r M t   kr k  r
2 2
m

Fm
But, k 
r
Fm
 M   kr  r
2 2

Mr P er
 Fm  
r r
2 2
For extreme bolt

P Mr P er
Fa  ;  Fm  
 
2 2
n r r

R  Fa  Fm  2 Fa Fm co s 
2 2
Resultant force,
Example: Calculate the safe load F that can be carried by the
connection as shown in the figure below. HSFG bolts of grade 8.8
with 20 mm diameter are used. Assume the thickness of the bracket
plate as 12 mm and column used is ISWB 350. Assume no slip is
permitted and slip factor (μf) as 0.5. All dimensions in the figure
below are in mm.
Solution:
HSFG 8.8 bolt, Ø = 20 mm, μf = 0.5.
ISWB 350, tf = 11.4 mm
Proof load, 𝐹𝑜 = 𝐴𝑛𝑏 × 0.7𝑓𝑢𝑏
𝜋
= 0.78 × × 202 × 0.7 × 800 × 10−3 = 137 kN
4

(1) Slip resistance of bolt in bearing, 𝑉𝑑𝑠𝑓 = 𝜇𝑓 𝑛𝑒 𝑘ℎ 𝐹𝑜 /γ𝑛𝑓

= 0.5×1×1×137/1.25 = 55 kN

(2) Strength of bolt in bearing,

2.5𝑘𝑏 𝑑𝑡𝑓𝑢
𝑉𝑑𝑝𝑏 =
𝛾𝑚𝑏
 𝑒 40
= = 0.606,
3𝑑𝑜 3×22
𝑝 60
− 0.25 = − 0.25 = 0.66,
𝑘𝑏 = least of 3𝑑𝑜 3×22
𝑓𝑢𝑏 400
= = 0.975,
𝑓𝑢 410
1
= 0.606

Here, thickness, t will be the thickness of flange of ISWB350 = 11.4

mm.

410
So, 𝑉𝑑𝑝𝑏 = 2.5 × 0.606 × 20 × 11.4 × × 10−3
1.25
= 113 kN

Hence, Bolt Value= least of (55 & 113) = 55 kN

 𝑟1 = 502 + 602 = 78.1 𝑚𝑚, 𝑟2 = 50 𝑚𝑚

𝑟 2 = 4𝑟12 + 2𝑟22 = 4 × 78.12 + 2 × 502

= 29398 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹
𝐹𝑎 =
6
𝐹 × 180
𝐹𝑚1 = × 78.1 = 0.478𝐹
29398
𝐹 × 180
𝐹𝑚2 = × 50 = 0.306𝐹
29398
−1
50
𝜃1 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛 = 50.19° ; 𝜃2 = 0
60
 𝐹𝑟1 = 𝐹𝑎2 + 𝐹𝑚21 + 2𝐹𝑎 𝐹𝑚1 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃1

1 2 1
=𝐹 + 0.4782 + 2 × × 0.478 × 𝑐𝑜𝑠50.19
6 6

= 0.599𝐹

1 2 1
𝐹𝑟2 = 𝐹 + 0.3062 +2× × 0.306 × 𝑐𝑜𝑠0
6 6

= 0.473𝐹
∴ 𝐹𝑟 = max 𝑜𝑓 𝐹𝑟1 & 𝐹𝑟2 = 0.599𝐹
∴ 0.599𝐹 = 55

𝑜𝑟 𝐹 = 92 kN
DESIGN OF ECCENTRIC CONNECTION
Load lying in plane of bolted joint
Design procedure for eccentric load lying in plane of bolt
groups:
•Assume a suitable diameter ‘d’ for the bolt.

•Find strength of one bolt in shear, bearing and get bolt value, Bsd.

•If moment coming on the joint is much less compare to the direct
load, use formula: n = P/ Bsd to find approximate numbers of
bolts.

•Increase the number of bolts to a certain percentages (say 50%)

and then arrange the total number of bolts in two or more vertical
lines at a suitable spacing, edge and pitch.

•If moment on the joint is much high compare to the direct load,
use formula:n  6M
n ' p  B sd
Design procedure for eccentric load lying in plane of bolt
groups:
Here, n = number of bolts per line.
p = pitch of the bolt.
n' = number of bolt lines.

•Increase the number of bolts to a certain percentages (say 50%)

and then arrange the number of bolts per line.

•The resultant force for the critical bolt is to be calculated.

•If resultant force in the critical bolt is less than the bolt value,
then the joint is safe.

•Otherwise, increase the number of bolts per line.

Example: Design a bolted bracket connection to transfer an end
reaction of 300 kN with an eccentricity of 170 mm, due to factored
load as shown in the figure. The steel used is of grade FE 410. Use 20
mm diameter bolt of grade 4.6. The thickness of bracket plate is 10
mm and the column section is ISHB 200 @ 365.91 N/m.

eo =170 mm

ISHB 200 300 kN

Bracket plate
Example: Design a bolted bracket connection to transfer an end
reaction of 300 kN with an eccentricity of 170 mm, due to factored
load as shown in the figure. The steel used is of grade FE 410. Use 20
mm diameter bolt of grade 4.6. The thickness of bracket plate is 10
mm and the column section is ISHB 200 @ 365.91 N/m.

eo =170 mm

ISHB 200 300 kN

Bracket plate
Solution: For Fe 410 grade of steel: f u  410 M Pa
For bolts of grade 4.6: f ub  400 N / m m 2
Partial safety factor for the material of bolt:  m b  1.25
For column section ISHB 200 @ 365.91 N/m,
Gauge, g  100 m m
Thickness of flange, t f  9.0 m m
Diameter of bolt, d  2 0 m m
Diameter of hole, d 0  22 mm [Table 19 IS 800]
Minimum edge distance, e = 1.5×22 = 33 mm [cl. 10.2.4.2 –IS 800]
Net shear area of the bolt at threads,

Anb  0.78   20  245 m m
2 2

4
Minimum pitch, p = 2.5×20 = 50 mm

Provide e = 35 mm and p = 60 mm
 f ub
Strength of bolt in single shear, V dsb   n n Anb  n s A sb 
3   mb
3
400  10
 1  245  0   45.26 kN
3  1.25

2.5  k b  d  t  f u
Strength of bolt in bearing, V dpb 
 mb

kb is smaller of 35/(3×22), 60/(3×22)-0.25, 400/410, 1

Hence, kb = 0.53
3
2.5  0.53  20  9  410  10
V sd   78.23 kN
1.25

Hence, the strength of the bolt, V sd  45.26 kN

Let us provide bolts in two vertical rows.

Moment due to eccentricity, M = 170×300 = 51000 kN-mm
number of row, n   2
Number of bolts required in one row,
6M 6  51000
n   7.51  8
pn V sd 60  2  45.26

Provide 16 bolts on each bracket plate with 8 bolts in each vertical

line.
eo =170 mm

ISHB 200 300 kN

50 mm

θ rn
c/c distance
@ 60 mm

Bracket plate
Force on critical bolt A
P 300
The direct force, F1    18.75 kN
n 16
P e 0 rn
The force in the bolt due to twisting moment, F2 
r
2

Eccentricity, eo = 170 mm
rn  210  50  215.87 m m
2 2

 r  4  [(210  50 )  (150  50 )  (90  50 )  (30  50 )]

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

 342400 m m
2

300  170  215.87

F2   32.15 kN
342400
 50
cos    0.232
210  50
2 2

Resultant force on the critical bolt,

F  F1  F2  2 F1 F2 co s 
2 2

F  18.75  32.15  2  18.75  32.15  0.232

2 2

 40.8 kN  45.26 kN

Hence, connection is safe.

ECCENTRIC CONNECTION
Load lying in plane of welded joint
 Load lying in plane of welded joint

e b
y

d r

x

Maximum stress will be, where r is maximum and

angle between the two force is minimum
Let us consider a weld of size = S
Throat thickness, t  0.707S

If
P  Total vertical load
e  Eccentricity
L  total length of the weld = 2b + d

Then, the direct shear stress in the weld,

Also, the stress due to bending,

 Where,
M  Moment = Pe
r  The radial distance of the welding point
from the CG of the weld
Ip Polar moment of inertia of the weld = Ixx + Iyy

At any point the resultant stress is given by

Where,  the angle between them

For critical condition, developed stress should be
less than the permissible stress in weld.
Example:
A bracket is subjected to a load of 50 kN and is connected to a
stanchion by welding. Find the size of the weld so that the load can
be carried safely.
50 kN

mm

X Distance of the CG of the welded area from BC

 Solution :
Eccentricity of the load = 150 + 100 – 25 = 225 mm

mm4

Similarly,
mm4

mm4

Area =
Maximum radial distance, mm
Moment, kNm

Maximum shear stress due to bending,

Direct shear stress,

Resultant stress,
Strength of weld = 410/ (√3×1.25) = 189.37MPa

Therefore, 539.88/t = 189.37, Thus t = 539.88/189.37 = 2.85 mm

Size of the weld, s= t/0.707 = 4.03 mm

Hence, provide 5 mm size of the weld.

 ECCENTRIC CONNECTION
Load lying perpendicular to the plane of bolted joint

1
 P Gusset Plate
e

+
+
+
+ h
+
Line of +
rotation +
b
Bracket angle
Column
Forces on bolts
Clause 10.11.2.1 of IS 800:2007 provides general method of analysis

In this type of loading, the bolts are in the combined action of shear
2
and tension.
Assumptions
In practice, the line of rotation (i.e. the neutral axis) is assumed to
lie at a height of 1 7 th the depth of bracket measured from the
bottom edge of bracket to the center line of the top most bolt.

Center of rotation will not be center of bolt group. Because the area
of bracket section below the center of rotation will be in
compression which will be much higher than the area of bolts in
tension.

Center of rotation will not be at the foot of bracket. Because bottom

of the bracket and stanchion are not perfectly rigid.

3
 The tensile force T in any bolt above the line of rotation will be
proportional to its distance from the NA or the line of rotation.

So, Here,
yi Distance from NA to any bolt
k  elastic constant

The moment of resistance due to this tensile force = 𝑇𝑖 𝑦𝑖 = 𝑘𝑦𝑖 2

So, total Moment of resistance provided by the bolts in tension,

𝑀′ = 𝑘𝑦𝑖 2 = 𝑘 𝑦𝑖 2

4
 Or,

Therefore, Tensile force in bolt i,

Tensile force in the extreme critical bolt will be:

Total tensile force,

For equilibrium, total tensile force = total compressive force, Thus

This compressive force acts at a distance of from the

NA
5
Hence taking moment about NA we get
External moment (M) = Moment resisted by bolts in tension
(M’) + Moment resisted by compressive force.

6
Also the tensile force in the extreme bolt,

Where ymax is the maximum distance of the bolt from neutral axis.
Thus,

7
Design Steps
1. Select nominal diameter of bolt and provide pitch and edge
distance suitably.

2. Calculate the design shear strength (Vdsb)

3. Select number of bolt lines, n’ and external moment (M) due to

eccentricity.

4. Find the approximate number of bolts (n) per line from the
following formula:
6M
n
n ' p  V sdb

5. Compute the shear force (Vsb) in the bolt.

8
Design Steps
6. Calculate the design tensile strength of the bolt (Tdb).

7. Calculate tensile force (Tb) in the extreme critical bolt.

8. Check for developed shear and tension individually:

Vsb < Vdsb and Tb < Tdb.

9. The connection should be checked against combined shear and

tension using the interaction formula:
𝑉𝑠𝑏 2 𝑇𝑏 2
+ ≤ 1.0
𝑉𝑑𝑠𝑏 𝑇𝑑𝑏

9
 DESIGN OF ECCENTRIC CONNECTION
Load lying perpendicular to the plane of bolted joint

1
Design Steps
1. Select nominal diameter of bolt and provide pitch and edge
distance suitably.

2. Calculate the design shear strength (Vdsb)

3. Select number of bolt lines, n’ and external moment (M) due to

eccentricity.

4. Find the approximate number of bolts (n) per line from the
following formula:
6M
n
n ' p  V sdb

5. Compute the shear force (Vsb) in the bolt.

2
Design Steps
6. Calculate the design tensile strength of the bolt (Tdb).

7. Calculate tensile force (Tb) in the extreme critical bolt.

8. Check for developed shear and tension individually:

Vsb < Vdsb and Tb < Tdb.

9. The connection should be checked against combined shear and

tension using the interaction formula:
𝑉𝑠𝑏 2 𝑇𝑏 2
+ ≤ 1.0
𝑉𝑑𝑠𝑏 𝑇𝑑𝑏

3
Example:
Design a bracket connection to transfer an end reaction of 200 kN
due to factored load as shown in the figure. The end reaction from
the girder acts at an eccentricity of 250 mm from the face of the
column flange. Design bolted joint connecting the Tee-flange with
the column flange. Steel is of grade Fe 410 and bolts of grade 4.6
200 kN
A

250mm

Tee bracket

A
4
Solution:
For Fe 410 grade of steel: 𝑓𝑢 = 410 𝑀𝑃𝑎
For bolts of grade 4.6 : 𝑓𝑢𝑏 = 400 𝑀𝑃𝑎
Partial safety factor for the material of bolt: 𝛾𝑚𝑏 = 1.25
The bolts along section AA are subjected to
i) Shear due to the load, P = 200 kN passing through the c.g. of the
joint
ii) Bending moment, M = 200×250 = 50,000 kN-mm

Let us provide 24 mm diameter bolts for making the connection.

Diameter of hole d0 = 24+2 = 26 mm [ table 19, IS 800]
Net tensile stress area,
𝜋
𝐴𝑛𝑏 = 0.78 × × 242 = 353 𝑚𝑚2
4

5
Minimum pitch, p = 2.5×24 = 60 mm
Minimum edge distance, e = 1.5d0 = 1.5×26 = 39 mm [cl. 10.2.4.2, IS 800]
Provide p = 65 mm and e = 40 mm.
𝐴𝑛𝑏 𝑓𝑢𝑏
Strength of bolt in single shear, 𝑉𝑑𝑠𝑏 = 𝑉𝑠𝑑 =
3𝛾𝑚𝑏
353×400
= × 10−3
3×1.25
= 65.22 kN
𝑇𝑛𝑏
Strength of bolt in tension, 𝑇𝑑𝑏 =
𝛾𝑚𝑏

𝑇𝑛𝑏 = 0.9𝑓𝑢𝑏 𝐴𝑛𝑏 = 0.9 × 400 × 353 × 10−3 = 127.08 𝑘𝑁

127.08
Hence, 𝑇𝑑𝑏 = = 101.66 kN
1.25
The bolts will be provided in two vertical rows, one on each side of
the web of the Tee section, connecting the flanges of the two sections.
6
Number of bolts required in one row,
6𝑀 6 × 50000
𝑛= ′
= = 5.95 ≈ 6
𝑝𝑛 𝑉𝑠𝑑 65 × 2 × 65.22
Hence provide 6 bolts in each row at a pitch of 65 mm and edge
distance of 40 mm.
Total depth of the bracket plate = 5×65+2×40 = 405 mm
h = 405 – 40 = 365 mm
The neutral axis is assumed to lie at h/7 from the bottom of the
365
bracket, i.e., at = 52.14 mm
7

𝑦𝑖 = 2 × [ 65 + 40 − 52.14 + 130 + 40 − 52.14

+ 195 + 40 − 52.14 + 260 + 40 − 52.14

+(325 + 40 − 52.14)]
= 1828.6 mm 7
𝑦𝑖2 = 2 × 52.862 + 117.862 + 182.862 + 247.862 + 312.862

= 418877.8 𝑚𝑚2
𝑦𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ℎ − 52.14 = 365 − 52.14 = 312.86 𝑚𝑚2

200 kN
A
250mm

365 312.86
405 mm

52.14

A
8
Maximum tensile force in the critical bolt,
𝑀𝑦𝑚𝑎𝑥 50000×312.86
𝑇𝑏 = = = 37.35 kN < 101.66 (𝑇𝑑𝑏 )
𝑦𝑖2 418877.8

Shear force in the critical bolt,

𝑃 200
𝑉𝑠𝑏 = = = 16.67 𝑘𝑁 < 65.22 𝑘𝑁 (𝑉𝑑𝑠𝑏 )
𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡 2×6

Check
2 2
𝑉𝑠𝑏 𝑇𝑏
+ ≤ 1.0
𝑉𝑑𝑠𝑏 𝑇𝑑𝑏

16.67 2 37.35 2
or + = 0.2 ≤ 1
65.22 101.66

Hence the bolt group is safe. 9

 ECCENTRIC CONNECTION
Load lying perpendicular to the plane of welded joint

1
 Load Lying Perpendicular to the Plane of Weld Joint
(a) Fillet Weld
(b) Butt Weld

Load
The direct shear stress in the weld = q =
Effective weld area

2
(a) Fillet Weld
𝑃 𝑃
1. The shear stress in the fillet weld, 𝑞 = =
𝑙𝑤 𝑡𝑡 2𝑑×𝑡𝑡
Here, P is the load and e is the eccentricity
d is the depth of bracket plate/welding depth
𝑙𝑤 is total effective length of weld
𝑡𝑡 is the throat thickness of the fillet weld
2. The stress due to bending,

&

Resultant stress,
3
Design Steps (Fillet weld)
1. Select a suitable size of weld and then compute throat thickness
𝑓
and weld strength, 𝑅𝑤 = 𝑢
3𝛾𝑚𝑤

3𝑃𝑒
2. Calculate the depth of weld using expression: 𝑑 =
𝑡𝑡 𝑅𝑤

3. Increase depth d to certain percentage to accommodate shear

stress as well.

𝑃
4. Calculate direct shear stress, 𝑞 = and should be less than
2𝑑×𝑡𝑡
𝑅𝑤

4
Design Steps (Fillet weld)
3𝑃𝑒
5. Similarly, compute stress due to bending, 𝑓𝑏 = and should
𝑡𝑡 ×𝑑 2
be less than 𝑅𝑤

6. Calculate equivalent stress 𝑓𝑒 = 𝑞 2 + 𝑓𝑏 2 and should be less

than 𝑅𝑤

7. If the equivalent stress exceeds the design weld strength 𝑅𝑤

then length of weld should increased and above process be
repeated till the checks are satisfied.

5
Example: (Fillet weld)

Design a fillet weld to

connect a 10 mm thick
bracket to the flange of a
column as shown in the
figure below.

6
 Solution:
Unknown: Size of weld
Let s = size of weld; Throat thickness, tt = 0.707s
3
P 50× 10 176.8
Vertical shear stress, q= = = M Pa
2dt t 2× 200× 0.707s s

6M 6× P × e
Horizontal shear stress due to bending, f b = 2
= 2
2t t d 2t t d
3
6× 50× 10 × 150
= 2
2× 0.707s× 200
795.6
= M Pa
s

7
Resultant stress at extreme fiber,
2 2
 176.8   795.6  815
fe  q  fb   
2 2
   
 s   s  s

Weld strength, 𝑅𝑤  410 /   3  1.25   189.37 M Pa

780
  189.37
s
 s  4.3
So, Adopt a weld size of 5 mm.

8
(b) Groove Weld
𝑃 𝑃
1. The shear stress in the fillet weld, 𝑞 = =
𝑙𝑤 𝑡𝑒 𝑑×𝑡𝑒
Here, P is the load and e is the eccentricity
d is the depth of bracket plate/welding depth
𝑙𝑤 is total effective length of weld
𝑡𝑒 is the effective thickness of the groove weld
2. The stress due to bending,

&

Resultant stress,
9
Design Steps (Groove weld)
1. Select a suitable size of weld and then compute effective
𝑓𝑦
thickness and weld strength, 𝑅𝑤 =
𝛾0

6𝑃𝑒
2. Calculate the depth of weld using expression: 𝑑 =
𝑡𝑒 𝑅𝑤

3. Increase depth d to certain percentage to accommodate shear

stress as well.

𝑃
4. Calculate direct shear stress, 𝑞 = and should be less than
𝑑×𝑡𝑒
𝑅𝑤

10
Design Steps (Groove weld)
6𝑃𝑒
5. Similarly, compute stress due to bending, 𝑓𝑏 = and should
𝑡𝑒 ×𝑑 2
be less than 𝑅𝑤

6. Calculate equivalent stress 𝑓𝑒 = 3𝑞2 + 𝑓𝑏 2 and should be less

than 𝑅𝑤

7. If the equivalent stress exceeds the design weld strength 𝑅𝑤

then length of weld should be increased and above process be
repeated till the checks are satisfied.

11
Example: (Groove weld)

Design a groove weld to

connect a 10 mm thick
bracket to the flange of a
column as shown in the
figure below.

12
 Solution:
Let provide a double J groove weld.
Therefore, effective throat thickness = thickness of bracket
plate = te = 10 mm
3
P 50× 10
Vertical shear stress, q= = = 25 M P a
dt e 200× 10

Horizontal shear stress due to bending, 6M 6× P × e

fb = 2
= 2
t ed t ed
3
6× 50× 10 × 150
= 2
10× 200
=112.5 M P a

13
Resultant stress at extreme fiber,

3   25    112.5   120.55
2 2
fe  3q  f b 
2 2

Weld strength, 𝑅𝑤  f y /  m 0  250 / 1.1  227.27 M P a

Here, the resultant stress is less than the weld strength.

So the joint is safe.

14
TENSION MEMBERS
AND NET AREA
 TENSION MEMBERS

Tension members are structural members that are

subjected to axial tensile forces (truss members, cables
in suspension bridges, bracing for buildings, etc).

Any cross-sectional configuration may be used, since the

only determinant of strength is the cross-sectional area.

Circular rods and rolled angle shapes are commonly used.

A member carrying direct tension is called a “tie”.

1 Wires & Cables

Types of
2 Rods & wires
tension
3 Single structural shapes & plates
members:
4. Built up sections

Various forms of tension members

Various forms of tension members
 Factors affecting the strength
 Effect of bolt holes: As discussed earlier bolt holes result in a
reduction in the area of cross section offered to resist tension and
hence cause a decrease in the strength.
 Geometry factor: A lower ratio of gauge length g to the diameter d
results in containment of contraction at the net section and hence
is more efficient.
 Ductility factor: An increase in the ductility of the member
increases the strength of the member as it results in a more even
distribution of stresses.
 Effect of residual stresses: Residual stresses have a more
pronounced effect in the case where fatigue is involved.
 Spacing of fasteners: The closer spacing of fasteners relative to
their diameter may sometimes lead to block shear failure at the
ends.
 Shear lag effect: The non-uniform stress distribution that takes
place in a tension member adjoining a connection, in which every
element of the cross section is not directly connected, is
commonly termed as the shear lag effect. This effect decreases the
design strength of the member because the whole cross section is
not completely effective at the critical section location.

Net area
When a tension member is joined to any other members by bolts,
pins or holes its gross cross-sectional area is reduced by the holes
of these fasteners. Hence, the tension members are designed for its
net sectional area. The areas of each part of a section, calculated
after deducting the areas of holes etc., if any, from the gross area
of the respective part, is termed as net area. Thus, net area of the
respective part = gross area of the respective part - area of holes
in that part.
1. Net Sectional Area: Plate

(i) Chain bolts in the plate section:

𝑨𝒏𝒆𝒕 = 𝒃 − 𝒏𝒅𝒉 𝒕 Where,

t  Thickness of the plate
dh Gross Diameter of the plate
b  width of plate
n→ No. of bolts in one line
(ii) Staggered/zig-zag bolt

In case of staggered bolts the net cross-sectional area along the chain
𝒑𝟐𝒔𝒊 𝒕
of the bolts is increased by an amount equal to
𝟒𝒈𝒊

Where,
psi  Staggered pitch
gi  Gauge distance 2
𝑝𝑠𝑖 𝑡
Deduction = Sum of sectional area holes =
4𝑔𝑖

Failure: 1-2-3-4 / 1-2-5-6 / 1-2-5-3-4

 𝒑𝟐𝒔𝒊
𝑨𝒏 = 𝒃 − 𝒏𝒅𝒉 + 𝒕
𝟒𝒈𝒊
𝒊

Where,
b , t = width and thickness of the plate respectively.
dh = diameter of the bolt hole (2 mm in addition to the diameter of the
hole, in case the directly punched holes).
g = gauge length between the bolt holes as shown in following figure.
ps = staggered-pitch length between line of bolt Holes as shown in
following figure.
n = number of bolt holes in the critical section.
i = subscript for summation of all the inclined legs.
(iii) For staggered bolts of different pitch & gauge distance
the net area will be as follows

𝒑𝟐𝒔𝟏 𝒑𝟐𝒔𝟐
𝐴𝑛𝑒𝑡 = 𝑏 − 𝑛𝑑 + + 𝑡
4𝑔1 4𝑔2

Failure: 1-2-3/1-2-4-5-6 /1-2-5-6/1-2-4-7

CALCULATION OF
NET AREA IN
TENSION MEMBERS
Example: Calculate the net area of an angle ISA 75×75×6 which
is connected to the gusset plate through single leg as shown in
following figure. Bolts used are M20 grade 4.6.

Gusset plate Gusset plate

Weld
Bolt
ISA 75x75x6
ISA 75x75x6

(a) Bolt Connection (b) Weld Connection

Solution:
(a) For bolt connection
Diameter of bolt hole = 20+ 2 = 22 mm
Net Area of connected leg, Anc = (75-6/2-22) × 6 = 300 mm2
Gross area of outstanding leg, Ago = (75-6/2) × 6 = 432 mm2
Net area, An = Anc + Ago = 300 + 432 = 732 mm2
(b) For weld connection
Net Area of connected leg, Anc = (75-6/2) × 6 = 432 mm2
Gross area of outstanding leg, Ago = (75-6/2) × 6 = 432 mm2
Net area, An = Anc + Ago = 432 + 432 = 864 mm2
Example: A flat size of 200 × 8 mm of grade Fe 410 is used as
tension member in a roof truss. It is connected to a 12 mm
gusset plate by M16 bolt of grade 4.6 using two alternate
methods of bolting as shown in following figures. Calculate the
net area of the members.
Solution:
Diameter of bolt hole = 16 + 2 = 18 mm
(a) Chain bolting
The critical sectional area of the plate will be along 1-2-3-4.
So the net area, An = (200 – 2 × 18) × 8 = 1312 mm2

(b) Zig-zag bolting

In this case, the critical section may fail along 1-2-3, 4-5-2-3, 4-5-
2-6-7 or 4-5-6-7. Hence, the net area for all possible sections
needs to be calculated and the minimum value will be considered
as net area.
The net area along 1-2-3, 𝐴𝑛 = 𝑏 − 𝑛𝑑ℎ 𝑡 = (200 – 18) × 8 =
1456 mm2
Net area along 4-5-2-3,

2
𝑝𝑠𝑖 752
𝐴𝑛 = 𝑏 − 𝑛𝑑ℎ + × 𝑡 = 200 − 2 × 18 + ×8
4𝑔𝑖 4 × 50
=1537 mm2

Net area along 4-5-2-6-7,

752
𝐴𝑛 = 200 − 3 × 18 + 2 × × 8= 1618 mm2
4×50
It may be noted that the section along 4-5-6-7 will not be critical
as the strength of the bolt 1 will be added to this section.
Thus the net sectional area = min of (1456 mm2, 1537 mm2 and
1618 mm2) = 1456 mm2
Therefore, the most critical sectional area will be along 1-2-3.
DESIGN STRENGTH OF
TENSION MEMBERS
 Design Strength of Tension Members

The factored design tension T, in the members shall satisfy the

following requirement (Clause 6.1, IS:800-2007) :

T < Td

Where Td = design strength of the member under axial tension.

Td is the lowest of the design strength due to the

(i) yielding of gross-section, Tdg ,

(ii) rupture of critical section Tdn and
(iii) block shear failure, Tdb.
 Design Strength due to Yielding of Gross-section
The design strength of the member under axial tension,
Tdg as governed by yielding of gross section is given by
(Clause 6.2, IS 800: 2007)

Tdg = Agfy /m0

Where,
fy is the yield stress of material in MPa,
Ag is the gross area of cross-section
m0 is the partial safety factor of failure in tension by
yielding (Table 5, IS 800: 2007)
 Design Strength Due to Rupture of Critical Section

Plates
The design strength in tension of a plate, Tdn as
governed by rupture of net cross-sectional area, An , at
the holes is given by (Cl. 6.3.1, IS 800: 2007)

Tdn = 0.9Anfu /m1

Where,
fu is the ultimate stress of material in MPa,
An is the net effective area of cross-section
m1 is the partial safety factor of failure in tension at
ultimate stress (Table 5, IS 800: 2007)
Threaded Rods
The design strength of threaded rods in tension, Tdn as
governed by rupture is given by (Cl. 6.3.2, IS 800: 2007)
Tdn = 0.9Anfu /m1
Where,
An is the net root area at the threaded section

Single Angles
The rupture strength of an angle connected through
one leg is affected by Shear Lag. The design strength, Tdn as
governed by rupture at net section is given by
(Cl. 6.3.3, IS 800: 2007):

Tdn = 0.9Ancfu /m1 + Agofy /m0

Where,
= 1.4 – 0.076 (w/t) (fy /fu) (bs /Lc)  fum0 /fym1
 0.7
Here, w = outstanding leg width,

bs = shear lag width, as shown in figure below.

Angles with single leg connection (Fig. 6, IS 800: 2007)

LC = length of the end connection, that is the distance between the

outermost bolts in the end joint measured along the load direction or
length of the weld along the load direction.
For preliminary sizing, the rupture strength of net section may be
approximately taken as:

Tdn =  Anfu /m1

Here,  = 0.6 for one or two bolts, 0.7 for three bolts
and 0.8 for four or more bolts along the length in the end
connection or equivalent weld length;

An = net area of the total cross-section;

Anc = net area of the connected leg;
Ago = gross area of the outstanding leg; and
t = thickness of the leg.
Other Section (Clause 6.3.4)

The rupture strength, Tdn , of the double angles, channels, I-

sections and other rolled steel sections, connected by one or
more elements to an end gusset is also governed by shear lag
effects. The design tensile strength of such sections as
governed by tearing of net section may also be calculated
using equation in Cl. 6.3.3, IS 800: 2007, where  is
calculated based on the shear lag distance bs , taken from the
furthest edge of the outstanding leg to the nearest bolt/weld
line in the connected leg of the cross section.
 Design Strength due to Block Shear
(Cl. 6.4, IS 800: 2007)

The strength as governed by block shear at an end

connection of plates and angles is calculated as follows:

Bolted Connections
The block shear strength, Tdb of connection shall be
taken as the smaller of,
Tdb = Avgfy /3m0 + 0.9Atnfu/m1 (For tension fracture and shear yield)
or
Tdb = 0.9Avnfu /3m1 + Atgfy /m0 (For tension yield and shear fracture)
 Block shear failure (Fig. 7, IS 800: 2007)
where
Avg and Avn = minimum gross and net area in shear along bolt line
parallel to external force, respectively (1-2 & 3-4 as shown in Fig.
7A and 1-2 as shown in Fig. 7B)
Atg and Atn= minimum gross and net area in tension from the bolt
hole to the toe of the angle, end bolt line, perpendicular to the line
of force, respectively (2-3 as shown in Fig. 7B), and fu and fy =
ultimate and yield stress of the material, respectively.
Welded Connection
The block shear strength, Tdb shall be checked for welded end
connections by taking an appropriate section in the member around
the end weld, which can shear off as a block.

Slenderness Ratio
The slenderness ratio is the ratio of unsupported length and least
radius of gyration. Theoretically there should not be any upper
limit of the slenderness ratio for a tension member as stability is of
little importance. However, a tension member may be subjected to
reversal force like wind, earthquake etc. Also, the limitation is
necessary to prevent undesirable vibration and lateral movement.
For this, IS 800-2007 code (clause 3.8, Table 3) has specified the
maximum values of effective slenderness ratio.
Maximum effective slenderness ratio (Table 3, IS 800: 2007)

Member Maximum effective

slenderness ratio
A tension member in which a reversal of direct 180
stress occurs due to loads other than wind or
seismic forces
A member subjected to compressive forces 250
resulting only from a combination of
wind/earthquake actions, provided the deformation
of such a member does not adversely affect the
stresses in any part of the structure.
A member normally acting as a tie in a roof truss or 350
a bracing member which is not considered effective
when subjected to reversal of stress resulting from
the action of wind or earthquake forces
Members always in tension (other than pre- 400
tensioned members)
STRENGTH CALCULATION OF
TENSION MEMBERS
Example:
Two ISA 75×50×8 are connected to a gusset plate on its same side
of thickness 10mm by four M18 grade 4.6 bolts. Find the design
tensile strength of the angle if (1) gusset is connected to the longer
leg (2) gusset is connected to the shorter leg.

75
ISA
T 18 ф 75x50x8
bolt
75

30 50 50 50 30
Solution:
(1) Gusset connected to the longer leg
2 ISA 75 × 50 × 8 connected back to back with its longer
length.
Thus, the gross area will be Ag = 2 × 938 = 1876 mm2
Strength due to yielding of gross section:
𝑓𝑦 ×𝐴𝑔 250×1876
𝑇𝑑𝑔 = = = 426.36 × 103 N = 426.36 kN
𝛾𝑚0 1.1
Dia. of bolt = 18 mm
Dia. of hole = 18+2 = 20
Let us assume pitch distance = 50 mm , edge distance = 30 mm
Strength governed by rupture of net section:
Anc = (75 - 8/2 - 20) × 8 = 408 mm2
Ago = (50 - 8/2) × 8 = 368 mm2
An = 408 + 368 = 776 mm2
𝑏𝑠 𝑤 𝑓𝑦 50:40;8 50 250
𝛽= 1.4 − 0.076 × × = 1 .4 − 0.076 × × ×
𝐿𝑐 𝑡 𝑓𝑢 3×50 8 410

= 1.242
𝑓𝑢 𝛾𝑚0
Again, 𝛽 ≤ and ≥ 0.7
𝑓𝑦 𝛾𝑚1

𝑓𝑢 𝛾𝑚0 410 × 1.1

= = 1.443
𝑓𝑦 𝛾𝑚1 250 × 1.25
Thus, satisfying above criteria, 𝛽 = 1.242
 0.9𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑐 𝛽𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑜 0.9×410×408 1.242×250×368
𝑇𝑑𝑛 = + = + = 224.31 × 103 N =
𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 1.25 1.1
224.31 kN
So, the strength due to rupture for two angles = 2 × 224.31 = 448.62 kN
𝛼×𝐴𝑛 ×𝑓𝑢 0.8×776×410
Alternatively, 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = 2 × = 2× = 407kN
𝛾𝑚1 1.25

Strength governed by block shear:

Avg = 8 × (3 × 50 + 30) = 1440 mm2
Avn = 8 × (3 × 50 + 30 – 3.5 × 20)= 880 mm2`
Atg = 8 × 35= 280 mm2
[as gauge g = 40 for 75 mm leg; p = 75 – 40 = 35]
Atn = 8 × (35 – 0.5 × 20) = 200 mm2
0.9𝐴𝑣𝑛 𝑓𝑢 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑡𝑔 0.9×410×880 250×280
𝑇𝑑𝑏1 = + = + = 213.62 × 103 N = 213.62
3𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 3×1.25 1.1
kN
Thus, Tdb1 for both the angle will be:
2 × 213.62 kN = 427.24 kN.
𝐴𝑣𝑔 𝑓𝑦 0.9 𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑡𝑛 1440×250 0.9×410×200
𝑇𝑑𝑏2 = + = +
3𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚1 3×1.1 1.25

= 248 × 103 N = 248 kN

So, Tdb2 for both the angle will be: 2 × 248 kN = 496 kN.
Thus, the block shear, Tdb = 427.24 kN
Design tensile strength of angle will be least of Tdg , Tdn and Tdb
(426.36 kN, 448.62 kN and 427.24 kN) = 426.36 kN
(2) Gusset connected to the shorter leg
Strength due to yielding of gross section:
𝑓𝑦 ×𝐴𝑔 250×1876
𝑇𝑑𝑔 = = = 426.36 × 103 N = 426.36 kN
𝛾𝑚0 1.1
Dia. of bolt = 18 mm
Dia. of hole = 18+2 = 20
Let us assume pitch distance = 50 mm , end distance = 30 mm.
Assuming gauge length for 50 mm leg = 25 mm
Strength governed by rupture of net section:
Anc = (50 - 8/2 - 20) × 8 = 208 mm2
Ago = (75 - 8/2) × 8 = 568mm2
An = 208 + 568 = 776 mm2
 𝑏𝑠 𝑤 𝑓𝑦 75:25;8 75 250
𝛽 = 1.4 − 0.076 × × = 1 .4 − 0.076 × × × = 1.133
𝐿𝑐 𝑡 𝑓𝑢 3×50 8 410

𝑓𝑢 𝛾𝑚0
Again, 𝛽 ≤ and ≥ 0.7
𝑓𝑦 𝛾𝑚1

𝑓𝑢 𝛾𝑚0 410 × 1.1

= = 1.443
𝑓𝑦 𝛾𝑚1 250 × 1.25
Thus, satisfying above criteria, 𝛽 = 1.133
0.9𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑐 𝛽𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑜 0.9×410×208 1.133×250×568
𝑇𝑑𝑛 = + = + = 207.661 × 103 N =
𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 1.25 1.1
207.66 kN
So, the strength due to rupture for two angles = 2 × 207.66 = 415.32 kN

𝛼×𝐴𝑛 ×𝑓𝑢 0.8×776×410

Alternatively, 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = 2 × = 2× = 407kN
𝛾𝑚1 1.25
Strength governed by block shear:
Avg = 8 × (3 × 50 + 30) = 1440 mm2
Avn = 8 × (3 × 50 + 30 – 3.5 × 20)= 880 mm2`
Atg = 8 × 25 = 200 mm2
[as gauge g = 25 for 50 mm leg; p = 50 – 25 = 25]
Atn = 8 × (25 – 0.5 × 20) = 120 mm2
0.9𝐴𝑣𝑛 𝑓𝑢 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑡𝑔 0.9×410×880 250×200
𝑇𝑑𝑏1 = + = + = 195.43 × 103 N =
3𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 3×1.25 1.1
195.43 kN
Thus, Tdb1 for both the angle will be: 2 × 195.43 kN = 390.86 kN.
𝐴𝑣𝑔 𝑓𝑦 0.9 𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑡𝑛 1440×250 0.9×410×120
𝑇𝑑𝑏2 = + = + = 224.37 × 103 N
3𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚1 3×1.1 1.25
= 224.37 kN
So, Tdb2 for both the angle will be: 2 × 224.37 kN = 448.74
kN.
Thus, the block shear, Tdb = 390.86 kN
Design tensile strength of angle will be least of Tdg , Tdn and
Tdb (426.36 kN, 415.32 kN and 390.86 kN) = 390.86 kN

(1) gusset is connected to the longer leg, Td = 426.36 kN

(2) gusset is connected to the shorter leg, Td = 390.86 kN

STRENGTH OF TENSION MEMBERS
WITH WELD CONNECTION
Example:
An ISA 90×60×6 angle of Fe 410 grade steel is connected to a 10
mm thick gusset plate by weld as shown in the figure below.
Calculate the design tensile strength of the angle if gusset is
connected to the (a) longer leg (b) shorter leg.

75 75
ISA 90 x 60 x 6
ISA 90 x 60 x 6
90 T 60 T

75
75
Solution:
(a) Gusset is connected to longer leg
Gross area, Ag for ISA 90 × 60 × 6 = 865 mm2. [From IS hand book:
SP:6(1)-1964]
The net area of connected leg, Anc = (90 - 6/2) × 6 = 522 mm2
Gross area of outstanding leg, Ago = (60 - 6/2) × 6 = 342 mm2
(i) Tensile strength governed by yielding of gross section:
[Clause 6.2]
𝑓𝑦 ×𝐴𝑔 250×865
𝑇𝑑𝑔 = = × 10−3 = 196.6 kN
𝛾𝑚0 1.1
(ii) Tensile strength governed by rupture of net section:
Therefore, the length of outstanding leg will be, w = 60 mm.
So, the shear lag width, bs = 60 mm.
The average length of weld along the direction of load
= Lc = (75+75) /2= 75 mm. Thus,
𝑏𝑠 𝑤 𝑓𝑦
𝛽= 1.4 − 0.076 × ×
𝐿𝑐 𝑡 𝑓𝑢
60 60 250
= 1.4 – 0.076× × × = 1.029
75 6 410
𝑓𝑢 𝛾𝑚0
Again, 𝛽 ≤ and ≥ 0.7
𝑓𝑦 𝛾𝑚1

𝑓𝑢 𝛾𝑚0 410 × 1.1

= = 1.443
𝑓𝑦 𝛾𝑚1 250 × 1.25
Thus, satisfying above criteria, 𝛽 = 1.029
0.9𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑐 𝛽𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑜
𝑇𝑑𝑛 = +
𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0
0.9×410×522 1.029×250×342
So, 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = + = 234× 103 N = 234 kN
1.25 1.1
 𝛼×𝐴𝑛 ×𝑓𝑢
Alternatively, 𝑇𝑑𝑛 =
𝛾𝑚1

Here, An =Anc +Ago = 522+342=864 mm2

0.8×864×410
Thus, 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = = 226.71 × 103 N = 226.7 kN
1.25
(iii) Tensile strength governed by block shear:
Assuming average length of weld on each side as 75 mm
Avg = 2 × 75 × 10 = 1500 mm2 [As gusset plate thickness = 10 mm]
Avn = 2 × 75 × 10 = 1500 mm2
Atg = 90 × 10 = 900 mm2
Atn = 90 × 10 = 900 mm2
 𝐴𝑣𝑔 𝑓𝑦 0.9 𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑡𝑛 1500×250 0.9×410×900
𝑇𝑑𝑏1 = + = +
3𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚1 3×1.1 1.25

= 462.5 kN
0.9𝐴𝑣𝑛 𝑓𝑢 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑡𝑔 0.9×1500×410 250×900
𝑇𝑑𝑏2 = + = +
3𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 3×1.25 1.1

= 460.2 kN
So, Tdb = 460.2 kN
Thus, the design tensile strength of the angle = least of (i), (ii)
and (iii) = 196.6 kN.
(b) Gusset connected to shorter leg
The net area of connected leg, Anc = (60 - 6/2) × 6 = 342 mm2
Gross area of outstanding leg, Ago = (90 - 6/2) × 6 = 522 mm2
Net cross sectional area, An = 522 + 342 = 864 mm2

i) Tensile strength governed by yielding of gross section:

𝑓𝑦 ×𝐴𝑔 250×865
𝑇𝑑𝑔 = = × 10−3 = 196.6 kN
𝛾𝑚0 1.1

(ii) Tensile strength governed by rupture of net section:

Here, the section is connected through its shorter leg.
Therefore, the length of outstanding leg will be, w = 90 mm.
So, the shear lag width, bs = 90 mm.
The average length of weld along the direction of load
= Lc = (75+75) /2= 75 mm. Thus,
𝑏𝑠 𝑤 𝑓𝑦
𝛽= 1.4 − 0.076 × ×
𝐿𝑐 𝑡 𝑓𝑢
90 90 250
= 1.4 – 0.076× × × = 0.566
75 6 410
𝑓𝑢 𝛾𝑚0
Again, 𝛽 ≤ and ≥ 0.7
𝑓𝑦 𝛾𝑚1

𝑓𝑢 𝛾𝑚0 410 × 1.1

= = 1.443
𝑓𝑦 𝛾𝑚1 250 × 1.25
Thus, satisfying above criteria, 𝛽 = 0.7
0.9𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑐 𝛽𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑜
𝑇𝑑𝑛 = +
𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0
0.9×410×342 0.7×250×522
So, 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = + = 184 kN
1.25 1.1
 𝛼×𝐴𝑛 ×𝑓𝑢 0.8×864×410
Alternatively, 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = = = 226.7 kN
𝛾𝑚1 1.25

(iii) Tensile strength governed by block shear:

Avg = 2 × 75 × 10 = 1500 mm2
Avn = 2 × 75 × 10 = 1500 mm2
Atg = 60 × 10 = 600 mm2
Atn = 60 × 10 = 600 mm2

𝐴𝑣𝑔 𝑓𝑦 0.9 𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑡𝑛 1500×250 0.9×410×600

𝑇𝑑𝑏1 = + = +
3𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚1 3×1.1 1.25

= 373.9 kN
 0.9𝐴𝑣𝑛 𝑓𝑢 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑡𝑔 0.9×1500×410 250×600
𝑇𝑑𝑏2 = + = +
3𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 3×1.25 1.1

= 392 kN
So, Tdb = 373.9 kN

Thus, the design tensile strength of the angle = least of (i), (ii) and
(iii) = least of (196.36, 184 and 373.9 ) = 184 kN.
STEPS FOR DESIGN OF
TENSION MEMBERS
Steps to design tension members
1. Find the gross area required to carry the given factored load (Tu)
considering the strength in yielding from the following
expression.
𝑻𝒖 ×𝜸𝒎𝟎
𝑨𝒈 =
𝒇𝒚
2. Select a suitable shape of section depending on the type of
structure and location of the member such that the gross area is more
than the gross area obtained in step 1.
Note:
Usually if the minimum edge and pitch distance is maintained, strength in yielding gives
least value. So, the design will be safe if gross area provided is greater than the gross area
required.

3. Determine the number of bolts or the welding length required and

suitably arrange the bolts.
Steps to design tension members

4. Find the strength considering

 Yielding of gross section (Tdg)
 Rupture at critical section (Tdn)
 Strength in block shear(Tdb)

5. If any of the above strength (Tdg, Tdn and Tdb) become less than
the factored tensile force (Tu), increase the size of the section and
repeat from step 3.
Steps to design tension members

6. Also, if the design strength (minimum of Tdg, Tdn and Tdb in

step 4. is too high compare to the factored load (Tu), decrease the
section size suitably and repeat from step 3.

7. Check for the slenderness ratio of the member as per Table 3,

IS 800: 2007. If the value of slenderness ratio exceeds the value
given in code, then increase the size of the section and redesign.
GUI based MATLAB Algorithm
Design is done for single angle sections with bolted connections.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Inputs:
Factored load 180.000 kN
Length of tension member 2500 mm
Allowable slenderness ratio 350.00
Type of section unequal with Connected leg larger
Ultimate stress of steel 410.000 N/mm^2
Yield stress of steel 250.000 N/mm^2
Partial safety factor governed by:
Ultimate stress(ym1) 1.250
Yielding(ym0) 1.100
Ultimate strength of bolt 400.000 N/mm^2
Diameter of bolt 20.000 mm
Partial safety factor for Bolt 1.250

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Output:
Required area of cross section area is 792.000 mm^2.

Test Case 1:
Section chosen is ISA 65 x 45 x 8 with combined cross section area 817.000
mm^2.
Shearing strength of one bolt is 45.274 kN.
Bearing strength of one bolt is 59.636 kN.
Number of bolt = Factored load/minimum of 45.274 and 59.636
Number of bolts for this factored load is 4

• Gross section yielding:

Tdg = Ag x fy/ym0
Tdg = 185.682 kN.

• Check for net section rupture:

alpha = 0.8 calculated from number of bolts
An = 640.000 mm^2
Tdn = alpha x An x fu/ym1
Tdn = 167.936 kN
As Tdn<Factored load, taking other section.....
Test Case 2:

Section chosen is ISA 70 x 45 x 8 with combined cross section area 858.000 mm^2.
Shearing strength of one bolt is 45.274 kN.
Bearing strength of one bolt is 59.636 kN.
Number of bolt = Factored load/minimum of 45.274 and 59.636
Number of bolts for this factored load is 4

• Gross section yielding:

Tdg = Ag x fy/ym0
Tdg = 195.000 kN.

• Check for net section rupture:

alpha = 0.8 calculated from number of bolts
An = 680.000 mm^2
Tdn = alpha x An x fu/ym1
Tdn = 178.432 kN
As Tdn<Factored load, taking other section.....
Test Case 3:

Section chosen is ISA 90 x 60 x 6 with combined cross section area 865.000

mm^2.
Shearing strength of one bolt is 45.274 kN.
Bearing strength of one bolt is 44.727 kN.
Number of bolt = Factored load/minimum of 45.274 and 44.727
Number of bolts for this factored load is 5

• Gross section yielding:

Tdg = Ag x fy/ym0
Tdg = 196.591 kN.

• Check for net section rupture:

alpha = 0.8 calculated from number of bolts
An = 732.000 mm^2
Tdn = alpha x An x fu/ym1
Tdn = 192.077 kN
Test Case 3:

• Block shear failure:

Maximum and minimum values of gauge distance calculated is 23.00 mm and
79.00 mm respectively.
avg=1380.000 mm^2
avn=786.000 mm^2
atn=138.000 mm^2
atg=204.000 mm^2
Td1 = Avg x fy/root(3) x ym0 + 0.9Atn x fu/ym1
Td2 = 0.9Avn x fu/root(3) x ym1 + Atg x fy/ym0
Tdb1 = 221.821 kN
Tdb2 = 180.329 kN

• Check for Slenderness ratio:

lamda = 2500/12.8 = 195 <350; so OK.

Hence the chosen section ISA 90 x 60 x 6 is OK and

OPTIMUM one under the present load and configuration.
If the connection is fillet weld:
Design is done for single angle sections with welded connections.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Inputs:
Factored load 180.000 kN
Length of tension member 2500.000 mm
Allowable slenderness ratio 350.00
Type of section unequal with Connected leg larger
Ultimate stress of steel 410.000 N/mm^2
Yield stress of steel 250.000 N/mm^2
Partial safety factor governed by:
Ultimate stress(ym1) 1.250
Yielding(ym0) 1.100
Throat thickness of weld 3.500 mm
Partial safety factor of weld 1.250
Weld is distributed on two sides parallel to axis to the load

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Output:
Required area of cross section area is 792.000 mm^2.
Strength of weld per mm = throat thickness of weld x fu/(root(3) x ymw)
Strength of weld per mm = 0.663 kN
Total weld required in mm = factored load/strength of weld per mm
Total weld = 272.000 mm

Test Case 1:

Section chosen is ISA 65 x 45 x 8 with combined cross section area 817.000

mm^2 and centre of gravity is 21.900 mm above the base of its unconnected leg.

Minimum length of weld at the upper side of the angle = factored load x centre of
gravity/(weld per length x length of connected leg
Minimum length of weld at the upper side of the angle,lw1 = 92.000 mm
Minimum length of weld at the lower side of the angle,lw2 = 272.000-92.000 =
180.000 mm
• Gross section yielding:
Tdg = Ag x fy/ym0
Tdg = 185.682 kN.

• Check for net section rupture:

alpha = 0.8
An = 816.000 mm^2
Tdn = alpha x An x fu/ym1 = 214.118 kN

• Block shear failure:

avg=2880.000 mm^2; avn=2880.000 mm^2
atn=520.000 mm^2; atg=520.000 mm^2

Td1 = Avg x fy/root(3) x ym0 + 0.9Atn x fu/ym1

Td2 = 0.9Avn x fu/root(3) x ym1 + Atg x fy/ym0
Tdb1 = 531.417 kN; Tdb2 = 609.046 kN

• Check for Slenderness ratio:

lamda = 2500/12.5 = 200 < 350 OK
Hence the chosen section ISA 65 x 45 x 8 is OK under the present load and
configuration.
Example:
A tension member 3 m long carries a factored tensile load of 200
kN. Design a suitable single angle unequal section when
connection is made with (i) 20 mm diameter bolts of grade 4.6
and (ii) fillet weld. Assume longer leg to be connected with plate.
Solution:
Step 1:
𝑃 200×103
Approximate gross area required = 𝐴𝑔 = = = 880 mm2
𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0 250/1.1

Let use ISA 75 × 50 × 10 with gross area, Ag as 1152 mm2

Anc = (75 - 10/2 - 22) × 10 = 480 mm2
Ago = (50 - 10/2) × 10 = 450 mm2
An = 480 + 450 = 930 mm2
Design strength due to yielding of gross section
𝑓𝑦 ×𝐴𝑔 250×1152
𝑇𝑑𝑔 = = = 261.8 × 103 N = 261.8 kN > 200 kN;
𝛾𝑚0 1.1

so ok.
DESIGN CALCULATION FOR
TENSION MEMBERS
Example:
A tension member 3 m long carries a factored tensile load of 200
kN. Design a suitable single angle unequal section when
connection is made with (i) 20 mm diameter bolts of grade 4.6
and (ii) fillet weld. Assume longer leg to be connected with plate.
Solution (Connected with bolts):
Step 1:
𝑃 200×103
Approximate gross area required = 𝐴𝑔 = = = 880 mm2
𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0 250/1.1

Let use ISA 75 × 50 × 10 with gross area, Ag as 1152 mm2

Anc = (75 - 10/2 - 22) × 10 = 480 mm2
Ago = (50 - 10/2) × 10 = 450 mm2
An = 480 + 450 = 930 mm2
Design strength due to yielding of gross section
𝑓𝑦 ×𝐴𝑔 250×1152
𝑇𝑑𝑔 = = = 261.8 × 103 N = 261.8 kN > 200 kN;
𝛾𝑚0 1.1

so ok.
Step 2:

a) For bolt connection

Cross sectional area of 20 mm diameter bolt
= 0.78 × π/4 × 202 = 245 mm2.
𝑓𝑢𝑏
𝑛𝑛 𝐴𝑛𝑏 :𝑛𝑠 𝐴𝑠𝑏
3
Shear strength of M20 bolt in single shear = =
𝛾𝑚𝑏
(400/√3)×(1×245)
1.25
= 45.3 × 103 N = 45.3 kN
Bearing strength of bolts = 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb
Here, thickness of the angle is 10 mm;
Let the edge distance = 30 mm and pitch = 50 mm
Thus, kb = lesser of [30/(3 × 22), 50/(3 × 22) - 0.25, 400/410, 1]
= 0.454
Bearing strength of bolt = 2.5 × 20 × 10 × 0.454 × 400/1.25 =
72.64 × 103 N = 72.64 kN
So bolt value = 45.3 kN
Step 3:
No. of bolts required = 200/45.3 = 4.4
Thus, use 5 bolts of 20 mm diameter in one line at pitch of 50
mm and edge distance of 30 mm.
Step 4:
Design strength governed by rupture of net section
Here, length of outstanding leg is: w = 50 mm and w1 = 40 mm.
So the shear lag width, bs = w + w1 – t = 50 + 40 – 10 = 80 mm.
Distance between end bolts , Lc = 4 × 50 = 200 mm.
𝑏 𝑤 𝑓𝑦 80 50 250
𝛽= 1.4 − 0.076 𝑠 × × = 1 .4 − 0.076 × × = 1.307
𝐿𝑐 𝑡 𝑓𝑢 200 10 410
𝑓𝑢 𝛾𝑚0
Again, 𝛽 ≤ and ≥ 0.7
𝑓𝑦 𝛾𝑚1

𝑓𝑢 𝛾𝑚0 410 × 1.1

= = 1.443
𝑓𝑦 𝛾𝑚1 250 × 1.25
Thus, satisfying above criteria, 𝛽 = 1.307
 0.9𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑐 𝛽𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑜 0.9×410×480 1.307×250×450
𝑇𝑑𝑛 = + = +
𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 1.25 1.1

= 275.37× 103 N = 275.37 kN

𝛼×𝐴𝑛 ×𝑓𝑢 0.8×930×410
Also, 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = = = 244 × 103 N = 244 kN
𝛾𝑚1 1.25

Design strength governed by block shear

Avg = 10 × (4 × 50 + 30) = 2300 mm2
Avn = 10 × (4 × 50 + 30 – 4.5 × 22) = 1310 mm2
Atg = 10 × 40 = 400 mm2
[assuming gauge g = 35 for 75 mm leg; p = 75 – 35 = 40]
Atn = 10 × (40 – 0.5 × 22) = 290 mm2
 0.9𝐴𝑣𝑛 𝑓𝑢 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑡𝑔 0.9×1310×410 250×400
𝑇𝑑𝑏1 = + = + = 314.2 kN
3𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 3×1.25 1.1
𝐴𝑣𝑔 𝑓𝑦 0.9 𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑡𝑛 2300×250 0.9×410×290
𝑇𝑑𝑏2 = + = + = 387.4 kN
3𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚1 3×1.1 1.25

So, Tdb = 314.2 kN

Thus, the design tensile strength of angle = 261.8 kN > 200 kN.
Hence, the selected angle is safe.
Again, the minimum radius of gyration (rmin) of the angle ISA
75×50×10 = 10.6 mm
The maximum slenderness ratio, λmax = Leff / rmin = 3 × 103 / 10.6 =
283 < 350.
So the angle is safe.
Solution (Connected with fillet weld):
(a) Strength due to yielding of gross section
𝑃 200×1000
Approximate area required = 𝐴𝑔 = = = 880 mm2
𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0 250/1.1

Use ISA 75 × 50 × 10 with Ag = 1152 mm2 and cx = 26 mm

Anc = (75 - 10/2) × 10 = 700 mm2
Ago = (50 - 10/2) × 10 = 450 mm2
𝑓𝑦 ×𝐴𝑔 250×1152
𝑇𝑑𝑔 = = = 261.8 × 103 N = 261.8 kN > 200 kN;
𝛾𝑚0 1.1

so section is safe.

(b) Strength governed by rupture of net section

Here, shear lag width, bs = 50 mm. Assuming average weld length,
Lw as 165 mm
 𝑏 𝑤 𝑓𝑦 50 50 250
𝛽= 1.4 − 0.076 𝑠 × × = 1 .4 − 0.076 × × = 1.329
𝐿𝑐 𝑡 𝑓𝑢 165 10 410

0.9𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑐 𝛽𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑜 0.9×410×700 1.329×250×450

𝑇𝑑𝑛 = + = + =342.56 kN
𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 1.25 1.1

An = Anc + Ago = 700 + 450 = 1150 mm2

𝛼×𝐴𝑛 ×𝑓𝑢 0.8×1150×410
Also, 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = = = 301.8 kN
𝛾𝑚1 1.25

(c) Strength governed by block shear

Avg = 10 × 165 × 2 = 3300 mm2
Avn = 10 × 165 × 2 = 3300 mm2
Atg = 10 × 75 = 750 mm2
Atn = 10 × 75 = 750 mm2
 0.9𝐴𝑣𝑛 𝑓𝑢 𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑡𝑔 0.9×410×3300 250×750
𝑇𝑑𝑏1 = + = +
3𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 3×1.25 1.1
= 732.88 × 103 N = 732.88 kN
𝐴𝑣𝑔 𝑓𝑦 0.9 𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑡𝑛 3300×250 0.9×410×750
𝑇𝑑𝑏2 = + = +
3𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚1 3×1.1 1.25
= 654.41 × 103 N = 654.41 kN
Thus, Tdb = 654.41 kN
Design tensile strength of angle = 261.36 kN > 200 kN, hence safe
Again, the minimum radius of gyration (rmin) of the angle ISA
75×50×10 = 10.6 mm
The maximum slenderness ratio, λmax = Leff / rmin = 3 × 103 / 10.6 =
283 < 350.
So the angle is safe.
Weld distribution:
75;26
Force resisted by weld at lower side of angle P1 = 200 × =
75
130.7 kN
26
Force resisted by weld at upper side of angle P2 = 200 × = 69.3 kN
75
Let use 6 mm weld. So the throat thickness of the weld will be (te) =
.707 × 6 = 4.24 mm
𝑃1 130.7 ×103
Length required at lower side Lw1 = 𝑡𝑒 𝑓𝑢 = 4.24×410 = 163 mm
3𝛾𝑚𝑤 3×1.25

𝑃2 69.3×103
Length required at upper side Lw2 = 𝑡𝑒 𝑓𝑢 = 4.24×410 = 86 mm
3𝛾𝑚𝑤 3×1.25

Here, average length of weld = (163+86)/2 = 124.5 mm

 𝑏 𝑤 𝑓𝑦
Thus, actual 𝛽 = 1.4 − 0.076 𝑠 × ×
𝐿𝑐 𝑡 𝑓𝑢
50 50 250
= 1 .4 − 0.076 × × = 1.307
124.5 10 410

0.9𝑓𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑐 𝛽𝑓𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑜 0.9×410×700 1.307×250×450

𝑇𝑑𝑛 = + = + =340.31 kN
𝛾𝑚1 𝛾𝑚0 1.25 1.1

And 𝑇𝑑𝑛 > 𝑇𝑢 = 200 𝑘𝑁. So ok.

DESIGN OF GUSSET PLATE
 Gusset Plate
Gusset plates are provided to make connections at the
places where more than one member is to be joined,
e.g., joints of truss, truss girders etc. The line of action
of the members meeting at a joint should coincide as
shown in below figure.
Design of Gusset Plates

 The shape and size of a gusset plate is decided on the

basis of direction of members meeting at the joint.
 The plate size is decided to meet the specification of pitch
and edge distance for the bolts to connect the members
meeting at the joint.
 Gusset plates are designed to resist the shear, direct and
flexural stresses acting on the critical sections.
 It is a usual practice to provide thickness of gusset plate
equal to or slightly higher than the members that are to be
connected by the gusset plates.
Example 2: Design the gusset plate of thickness 12 mm at
the joint O of a lower chord of truss as shown in the figure
below. Use M20 grade 4.6 bolts.

180 kN
140 kN C
ISA 90x60x8 ISA 100x65x6
B

D
300 kN 200 kN
A O 2-ISA 100x75x8
Solution:
Forces on members OA, OB, OC and OD are:
FOA = 300 kN
FOB = 140 kN
FOC = 180 kN
FOD = 200 kN
Shear strength of M20 bolts in single shear
𝑓𝑢𝑏
𝑛𝑛 𝐴𝑛𝑏 :𝑛𝑠 𝐴𝑠𝑏 (400/√3)×(1×245)
3
= = = 45.3 kN
𝛾𝑚𝑏 1.25

Shear strength of M20 bolts in double shear = 45.3 × 2

= 90.6 kN.
Assume pitch as 60 mm and edge distance as 40 mm.
Member OB:
kb = 40/(3 × 22), 60/(3 × 22) - 0.25, 400/410, 1 = 0.606
Bearing strength of bolts on 8 mm thick angles,
= 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb
= 2.5 × 20 × 8 × 0.606 × 400/1.25 = 77.57 × 103 N = 77.57 kN
Strength of angle per pitch length
0.9×𝑓𝑢 ×𝐴𝑛 0.9×410×[ 60;22 ×8]
= 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = =
𝛾𝑚1 1.25

= 89.74 kN
So the bolt value = 45.3 kN (lesser of 45.3, 77.57 and 89.74)
No. of bolt required = 140/45.3 = 3.1 ≈ 4
The length of gusset plate = 3 × 60 + 2 × 40 = 260 mm
Member OC:
Here, the value of kb will be same as derived for member OB as
pitch and edge are same. Bearing strength of bolts on 6 mm thick
angles = 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb
= 2.5 × 20 × 6 × 0.606 × 400/1.25 = 58.18 kN
Strength of angle per pitch length
0.9×𝑓𝑢 ×𝐴𝑛 0.9×410×[ 60;22 ×6]
= 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = =
𝛾𝑚1 1.25

= 67.31 × 103 N = 67.31 kN

So the bolt value = 45.3 kN (lesser of 45.3, 58.18 and 67.31)
No. of bolt required = 180/45.3 = 3.97 ≈ 4
Length of gusset plate = 3×60 + 2×40 = 260 mm
Member AD:
Net force in member AD = 300 – 200 = 100 kN
Bearing strength of bolts on 12 mm thick gusset plate
= 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb
= 2.5 × 20 × 12 × 0.606 × 400/1.25 = 96.9 × 103 N = 116.4 kN
0.9×𝑓𝑢 ×𝐴𝑛
Strength of angle per pitch length = 𝑇𝑑𝑛 =
𝛾𝑚1
0.9×410×[ 60;22 ×16]
= = 179.5 × 103 N = 179.5 kN
1.25
So the bolt value = 90.6 kN (i.e., lesser of 90.6 kN, 116.4 kN and
179.5 kN)
No. of bolts required = 100/90.6 = 1.1 ≈ 2
Length of gusset plate = 60 + 2 × 40 = 140 mm
Bolt arrangements are shown in following figure.
LUG ANGLES
 Lug Angles

 For a tension member subjected to a very large loading, the number

of bolts or the length of weld required to make its connection with
other members may often become large. Therefore, the size of
gusset plates becomes very large which will be uneconomical.
 The lug angle is a short length of an angle section used at a joint to
connect the outstanding leg of the member, thereby reducing the
length of the joint.
 For effective sharing of loads, the lug angle is provided at the
beginning of the joint.
 Lug angle is connected to outstanding leg of the main angle.
 Lug Angles

 Thus, the gusset plate material can be saved by the use of lug
angles. However, extra material is necessary for the use of lug
angles and their connections. Also, lug angles are not very
efficient in transmitting the load.
 Moreover, an eccentricity develops between the load and the
c.g. of the bolt group; thereby the use of lug angles is generally
avoided.
 Lug angles may be avoided by the use of unequal angle section
with the larger leg as the connected leg and using two rows of
staggered bolts.
 Design of Lug Angles
Cl. 10.12, IS 800:2007 provides the general procedure for design of
lug angles.
1. In the case of main member being an angle section:
• Lug angle is connected to the outstanding leg of the main angle.
• When an unequal angle is used, the load gets distributed in the
ratio of gross area of the connected leg and the outstanding leg.
• Lug angle and their connection to gusset or other supporting
member shall be capable of developing strength not less than 20%
in excess of force in the outstanding leg of main member.
• The attachment of lug angle to the main angle shall be capable of
developing strength of not less than 40% in excess of the force in
the outstanding leg of the angle.
Design of Lug Angles

2. In the case of main member being channel like section:

• The lug angle, as far as possible, should be disposed
symmetrically with respect to the section of the member.
• Lug angle and their connection to gusset or other supporting
member shall be capable of developing strength of not less
than 10% in excess of the force in the flange of the channel.
• Attachment of the lug angle to the member shall be capable
of developing strength of not less than 20% in excess of that
force.
 Design of Lug Angles

3. In no case fewer than two bolts, rivets or equivalent weld length

be used for attaching lug angle to gusset or other supporting
member.

4. The effective connection of the lug angle shall as far as possible

terminate at the end of the member connected.

5. The fastening of lug angle to the member shall preferably start in

advance of direct connection of the member to gusset or other
supporting member.
Example
A tension member carrying a factored tensile load of 180 kN has to
convert through a gusset plate of 10 mm thick using 16 mm diameter
of ordinary bolt of grade 4.6. The available length of the gusset plate
for making connection is 250 mm. Design the member & its
connection. Also design the lug angle if required.
Solution:
𝑇 180×103
Gross area required = = = 792 mm2
𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0 250/1.1

Select angle ISA 75 × 75 × 6 with Ag = 866 mm2 and rmin = 14.6 mm

Anc = (75 - 6/2 - 18) × 6 = 324 mm2
Ago = (75 - 6/2) × 6 = 432 mm2
An = 324 + 432 = 756 mm2
Strength governed due to rupture of net section
𝛼×𝐴𝑛 ×𝑓𝑢 0.8×756×410
𝑇𝑑𝑛 = = =198.4 × 103 N = 198.4 kN > 180 kN
𝛾𝑚1 1.25

Hence, the chosen section is safe.

End connection
Strength of M16 bolts in single shear,
𝑓𝑢
𝑛𝑛 𝐴𝑛𝑏 +𝑛𝑠 𝐴𝑠𝑏 (400/√3)×(1×157)
3
= = = 29 × 103 N = 29.0 kN
𝛾𝑚𝑏 1.25

Assume pitch as 40 mm and edge distance as 30 mm.

kb = least of [30/(3 × 18), 40/(3 × 18) - 0.25, 400/410, 1]= 0.49
Bearing strength of bolts on 8 mm thick angles,
= 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb
= 2.5 × 16 × 6 × 0.49 × 400/1.25 = 37.63 × 103 N = 37.63 kN
Therefore, bolt value = 29.0 kN
No. of bolts required = 180/29.0 = 6.2 ≈ 7
Length of gusset plate = 6 × 40 + 2 × 30 = 300 mm > 250 mm,
therefore lug angle should be used.
Lug Angle
Gross area of connected leg, Agc = (75 - 6/2) × 6 = 432 mm2
Gross area of outstanding leg, Ago = (75 - 6/2) × 6 = 432 mm2
Load on outstanding leg of main angle = 180 × 432/(432 + 432)
= 90 kN
Load on lug angle = 1.2×90 kN = 108 kN [Cl. 10.12.2, IS 800-
2007]
𝑇 108×103
Net area required for the lug angle = = = 475 mm2
𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0 250/1.1

Select ISA 60 × 60 × 5 as lug angle with Ag = 575 mm2

Let assume that the section is weakened by one row of 16 mm
diameter bolt.
So, the net area available = 575 – 16×5 = 495 mm2
Connection of lug angle with gusset plate
No. of bolts required = 108/29.0 = 3.72 ≈ 4
Length of gusset plate = 3 × 40 + 2 × 30 = 180 mm
Connection of main angle with gusset plate
Load on connected leg = 90 kN
No. of bolts required = 90/29.0 = 3.1 ≈ 4
Length of gusset plate = 3 × 40 + 2 × 30 = 180 mm

Connection of lug angle to main angle

No. of bolts required to connect outstanding leg of two angles
=1.4× 90/29.0 = 4.34 ≈ 5
Length of gusset plate = 4 × 40 + 2 × 30 = 220 mm.
The arrangement of bolts for connecting lug angle is shown in
following Figure
 SPLICES
IN TENSION MEMBERS
 Splices
Splices are introduced if the available length is less than the
required length of a tension member. If a single piece of requisite
length is not available, tension members are spliced to transmit the
necessary tension from one member to another. Various types of
splices are shown below.
Design of splices
 The strength of the splice plate and the bolts which are joining
them should be able to develop strength equal to the design load.
 When tension members of dissimilar thicknesses are to be
connected, packing/filler plates are introduced.
 The design shear capacity of bolts carrying shear through a packing
or filler plate in excess of 6 mm shall be decreased by a factor as
given below (Cl. 10.3.3.3, IS 800:2007).
βpkg = 1 – 0.0125tpk
Where, tpk = thickness of the packing plate in mm.
• As per IS specification, the splice connection should be designed
for a force of at least 0.3 times the member design capacity in
tension or the design action, which ever is more.
Example: Design a tension splice to connect two tension
member plates of size 200  10 and 220  12. The member is
subjected to a factored tensile force of 280 kN. Use M20
grade 4.6 ordinary bolts for the connection.
Solution:

Splice will be provided in both sides of the tension members.

Therefore, bolt value needs to be calculated for double shear.
Shear strength of M20 bolts in double shear
𝑓𝑢
𝑛𝑛 𝐴𝑛𝑏 :𝑛𝑠 𝐴𝑠𝑏 (400/√3)×(2×245)
3
= = = 90.6 × 103 N = 90.6 kN
𝛾𝑚𝑏 1.25

Assume pitch as 50 mm and edge distance as 30 mm.

kb = 30/(3 × 22), 50/(3 × 22) - 0.25, 400/410, 1 = 0.454
Bearing strength of bolts on 10 mm thick plate = 2.5 × d × t × kb
× fub/γmb = 2.5 × 20 × 10 × 0.454 × 400/1.25 = 72.64 × 103 N
= 72.64 kN
So the bolt value = 72.64 kN
No. of bolts required = 280/72.64 = 3.85 ≈ 4
Thickness of packing required = 12 – 10 = 2 mm
Since the thickness of packing is less than 6 mm, no additional
bolt will be necessary to connect it with the plate.
Thus, 4 nos. of bolts will be required on the splice with a pitch of
50 mm as shown in the figure below.
 2 mm
10 mm packing 12 mm

20 mm ф bolt @ 50 mm c/c

200 mm 220 mm

20 mm ф bolt @ 50 mm c/c
Check for strength at critical section:
Strength of main plate at critical section
0.9×𝑓𝑢 ×𝐴𝑛 0.9×410×[ 200;22×2 ×10]
= 𝑇𝑑𝑛 = = = 460.5 × 103 N =
𝛾𝑚1 1.25
460.5 kN > 280 kN
Thus the section is OK.
Design strength due to yielding of gross section:
𝑓𝑦 ×𝐴𝑔 250×200×10
𝑇𝑑𝑔 = = = 454.5 × 103 N = 454.5 kN > 280 kN.
𝛾𝑚0 1.1

So the design tensile strength of the member will be 454.5 kN.

Thickness of splice plate:
Let the thickness of splice plate is t.
Thus the strength of splice plate will be:
0.9×410×[ 200;22×2 ×𝑡×2]
= 92.1024t × 103 N = 92.1024t kN
1.25
The splice will be designed for 0.3 × 454.5 kN = 136 kN or the
factored tensile load of 280 kN which ever is more.
Thus the thickness of the splice plate will be:
280
𝑡= = 3.04 mm
92.1024
Let use 4 mm thick splice plate on both side of the member.
 4 mm splice
2 mm
10 mm packing 12 mm

4 mm splice
20 mm ф bolt @ 50 mm c/c

200 mm 220 mm

20 mm ф bolt @ 50 mm c/c
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
Definition:- A structural member which is straight and is
subjected to compressive forces along its axis is termed as a
compression member.

Various types of compression members

• The vertical compressive member in RCC buildings is

generally termed as column where as for steel building it
is called stanchion.

• The compressive member in a roof truss or bracing is

called as strut.

• The principal compression in a crane is called boom.

 MODES OF FAILURE OF COLUMN

1. Squashing
2. Local buckling
2. Overall flexural buckling
4. Torsional buckling
5. Flexural-torsional buckling

1. Squashing:
If the length of the compression member is relatively small then
the column will be able to attain its full strength or ‘squash
load’. Squash load = yield strength × cross sectional area.

2. Local buckling:
The individual elements of a compressive member such as
web, flange etc. may buckle locally.
3. Overall flexural buckling:
Failure due to flexural buckling occurs due to excessive
deflection of the member in its plane of weaker principle axis.

4. Torsional buckling:
Torsional buckling failure occurs due to torsional moment. The
member gets twisted about the shear center in the longitudinal
axis.

5. Flexural-torsional buckling
The flexural-torsional buckling occurs when the member bends
and twists simultaneously. Such type of failure happens with
unsymmetrical cross sections
 Classifications of Compression Member
depending on the length

 Short compression member: The failure stress will be equal

to the yield stress and buckling will not occur.

 Long compression member: Stress will occur due to

buckling of the member.

 Intermediate compression member: Failure will occur due

to the combined effect of crushing and buckling.
 ELASTIC BUCKLING OF EULER COLUMN

The theory of column buckling was first originated by Euler.

Euler considered an ideal column with the following
features.

 Material is homogenous and isotropic

 Material is perfectly elastic
 No imperfections (member is perfectly straight at its
initial state)
 No eccentricity of loading
 Column ends are hinged
 Column has no flaw
 ELASTIC BUCKLING OF EULER COLUMN

The governing differential equation is

Pcr 𝑑2𝑦 𝑃𝑐𝑟
+ 𝑦=0
𝑑𝑥 2 𝐸𝐼
The lowest value of the critical load
l 𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼
𝑃𝑐𝑟 = 2
y
𝑙
x
𝑃𝑐𝑟 𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼
𝜎𝑐𝑟 = =
𝐴 𝐴𝑙2
𝜋 2 𝐸𝑟 2 𝜋 2𝐸 𝜋 2𝐸
𝜎𝑐𝑟 = 2
= 2
= 2
𝑙 𝑙/𝑟 𝜆
Thus, the critical stress is inversely proportional to slenderness
ratio (𝜆)
 STRENGTH CURVE FOR AN IDEAL STRUT
(Axially loaded initially straight pin-ended column)

Column fails when the compressive stress is greater than or equal to the
values defined by ACB.
AC  Failure by yielding (Low slenderness ratios)
CB  Failure by bucking (  c )
𝑓𝑐 B'
Plastic yield defined by 𝑓𝑐 = 𝑓𝑦

For 𝑓𝑐 = 𝜎𝑐𝑟 = 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa;

𝐸
C Elastic buckling (𝜎𝑐𝑟 ),
𝑓𝑦 A A'
𝜆𝑐 = 𝜋 = 88.85 𝜋2 𝐸
𝑓𝑦 defined by
𝜆2

𝜆𝑐 𝜆 = 𝑙/𝑟

8
STRENGTH CURVE FOR AN IDEAL STRUT

fc/fy Plastic yield

1.0 Elastic buckling

1.0  = (fy / scr )1/2

Strength curve in a non-dimensional form

9
Factors affecting strength of a compressive member

 Material property of the member

 Length of the member
 Cross sectional configuration
 Support conditions
 Imperfections
 Residual stresses

The imperfections include the following:

• The material not being isotropic and homogenous
• Geometric variations of columns
• Eccentricity of load
 Cross Section Shapes for
Rolled Steel Compression Members

(a) Single Angle (b) Double Angle (c) Tee

(d) Channel (e) Hollow Circular (f) Rectangular Hollow

Section (CHS) Section (RHS)
 Cross Section Shapes for Built - up or
fabricated Compression Members

(a) Chanel (b) Chanel (f) Built-up Box Section

face to face Back to back

(d) Plated I Section (e) Built - up I Section

Effective Length Factor for Centrally Loaded Columns
with various End (Table 11 of IS 800 2007)

Theoretical K IS-800
End Conditions
value provisions
Columns with both ends pinned 1.0 1.0

Columns with both ends fixed 0.5 0.65

Columns with one end fixed and
0.7 0.8
other end pinned
Columns with one end fixed and
2.0 2.0
other end free
Columns partially restrained at
1.0 1.2
each end
Columns with one end
unrestrained and other end 2.0 2.0
rotation partially restrained
Effective Length of Compression Member (Table 11 IS 800 :2007)
 Effective length of column in frames
ANNEX D (clause 7.2.2) – IS 800 :2007

IS 800, gives the following equations for the effective length

factor k, based on Wood’s curve:
 For non-sway frames (braced frames):

1+0.145 𝛽1 +𝛽2 − 0.265 𝛽1 𝛽2

K= (D-1 IS 800:2007)
2−0.364 𝛽1 +𝛽2 − 0.247 𝛽1 𝛽2

 For sway frames (moment – resisting frames):

1 – 0.2 𝛽1 +𝛽2 − 0.12 𝛽1 𝛽2 0.5
K= (D-1 IS 800:2007)
1−0.8 𝛽1 +𝛽2 + 0.6 𝛽1 𝛽2
𝐾
Where 𝛽1 , 𝛽2 are given, 𝛽 =
𝐾𝑐 + 𝐾𝑏
Kc and Kb are the effective flexural stiffness of the columns or
beams meeting at the joint at the ends of the columns and rigidly
connected at the joints.
 DESIGN STRENGTH OF
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
 Multiple column design curves

Following four basic approaches were adopted to establish

column design formulae or curves.

i) Formula based on maximum strength

ii) Formula based on the yield limit sate (i.e., Perry-Robertson
formula)
iii) Formula based on tangent modulus theory
iv) Empirical formula such as Merchant-Rankine formula

The Indian code (IS 800 :2007) has adopted the multiple column
curves which is based on the Perry-Robertson theory and is
shown in the figure. This is similar to British Code BS 5950
(part-1) 2000.
 Merchant-Rankine formula The Indian code (IS 800 :1984)
1 1 1 𝑓𝑒 ×𝑓𝑦
= + 𝑛 Or , 𝑓 = 1
𝑓 𝑛 𝑓𝑒 𝑛 𝑓𝑦 𝑛 𝑛
𝑓𝑒 𝑛 + 𝑓𝑦

𝜋2 𝐸
Here, 𝑓𝑒 is the elastic critical stress in compression = 𝑓𝑐𝑐 =
𝜆2
n is a factor as 1.4

The allowable compressive stress will be

𝑓𝑐𝑐 × 𝑓𝑦
𝜎𝑎𝑐 = 0.6 1
𝑛 𝑛 𝑛
𝑓𝑐𝑐 + 𝑓𝑦
 𝑓𝑦
𝜆=
𝑓𝑐𝑟

Based on Perry-Robertson theory

Table 7, IS 800 :2007

Buckling Class a b c d
𝛼 (imperfection
0.21 0.34 0.49 0.76
factor)
 Buckling Class of Cross Sections (Table 10 IS 800 :2007)……
Cross Section Limits Buckling about Axis Buckling Class
Rolled I Section h/bf > 1.2 : z-z a
tf ≤ 40 mm y-y b
40 mm ≤ tf ≤ 100 z-z b
mm y-y c
h/bf ≤ 1,2 ; z-z b
tf ≤ 100 mm y-y c
z-z d
tf > 100 mm
y-y d
Welded I Section
z-z b
tf ≤ 40 mm
y-y c

z-z c
tf > 40mm
y-y d
Hollow Section
hot rolled any a

cold formed any b

 Buckling Class of Cross Sections (Table 10 IS 800 :2007)
Cross Section Limits Buckling about Axis Buckling Class

Welded Box Section Generally

any b
(except as
below)
thick welds z-z c
and
b/tf < 30
y-y c
h/tw < 30
Channel, Angle, T and Solid Sections

any c

Built-up Member

any c
 DESIGN STRENGTH:

The design compressive strength Pd, of a members is given by

(Cl. 7.1.2 IS 800 :2007):
𝑃 < 𝑃𝑑
Where 𝑃𝑑 = 𝐴𝑒 𝑓𝑐𝑑
𝐴𝑒 = effective sectional area ( cl. 7.3.2 IS 800)
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = design compressive stress of axially
loaded compressive members
as per clause 7.1.2.1 of IS 800 :2007
𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0 𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = =𝜒 ≤
𝜙+[𝜙2 −𝜆2 ]0.5 𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚0

Where 𝜙 = 0.5[1 + 𝛼 𝜆 − 0.2 + 𝜆2 ]

𝐾𝐿 2
𝜆= 𝑓𝑦 /𝑓𝑐𝑐 = 𝑓𝑦 /(𝜋 2 𝐸)
𝑟
 𝐾𝐿 2
fcc = Euler buckling stress = 𝜋 2 𝐸/
𝑟

Where 𝐾𝐿/𝑟 = effective slenderness ratio or ratio of

effective length KL, to appropriate radius of
gyration r
α = imperfection factor as given in Table 7, IS
800 :2007
𝜒 = stress reduction factor for different buckling
class, slenderness ratio, and yield stress
1
𝜒=
[𝜙+ 𝜙2 −𝜆2 0.5 ]

𝛾 m0 = partial safety factor for material strength

The stress reduction factor 𝝌 for different buckling classes a,
b, c and d is given in Table 8(a-d) of IS 800 :2007.
The design compressive stress fcd for various buckling classes
can be found in Table 9(a-d) of IS 800-2007.
 Allowable slenderness ratio of compression members:
(Table 3 IS 800:2007)

Type of Member KL/r

Carrying loads resulting from DL & superimposed loads 180
Carrying loads resulting from wind & seismic loads provided 250
the deformation of such a member does not adversely
affect the stress in any part of the structure
Normally acting as a tie in a roof truss or a bracing member 350
which is not considered effective when subjected to
reversal of stress resulting from the action of wind or
earthquake forces
Lacing bars in columns 145
Elements (components) in built-up section 50
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
Example: Determine the design axial load on the column
section ISMB 400, given that the height of the column is 3.5 m
and that it is pin-ended. Also assume the following:
𝑓𝑦 = 250 N/mm2, 𝑓𝑢 = 410 N/mm2; E = 2×105 N/mm2

Solution:
Properties of ISMB 400 [Table I SP:6(1)-1964]
Depth of section, h = 400 mm
Flange thickness, 𝑡𝑓 = 16 mm
Thickness of web, 𝑡𝑤 = 8.9 mm
Flange width, b = 140 mm
Cross-sectional area, A = 7846 mm2
𝑟𝑧 = 161.5 mm, 𝑟𝑦 = 28.2 mm
a) Buckling curve classification (Table 10, IS 800 :2007):
ℎ 400
= = 2.86 > 1.2; 𝑡𝑓 = 16 mm < 40 𝑚𝑚
𝑏 140
Hence, we should use buckling curve ‘a’ about z-z axis and ‘b’ about
y-y axis.
b) Effective length:
Since both ends are pinned effective length, 𝐾𝐿𝑦 = 𝐾𝐿𝑧 = 3.5 𝑚
c) Non-dimensional slenderness ratio:(7.1.2.1 of IS 800 :2007)

About z-z axis: 𝛼 = 0.21[Table 7, IS 800 :2007]𝜆𝑧 = 𝑓𝑦 /𝑓𝑐𝑐 =

𝐾𝐿𝑧 2
𝑓𝑦 /(𝜋 2 𝐸)
𝑟𝑧

2
3500
= 250 × /(𝜋 2 × 2 × 105)
161.5
= 0.2439
 𝜙 = 0.5 1 + 𝛼 𝜆 − 0.2 + 𝜆2
= 0.5 1 + 0.21 0.2439 − 0.2 + 0.24392 =0.534

𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0
𝑓𝑐𝑑 =
𝜙 + [𝜙 2 − 𝜆2 ]0.5
250/1.1
= = 225.2 N/mm2
0.534:[0.534 2 ;0.24392 ]0.5

About y-y axis: 𝛼 = 0.34[Table 7, IS 800 :2007]𝜆𝑌 = 𝑓𝑦 /𝑓𝑐𝑐 =

2
𝐾𝐿𝑦
𝑓𝑦 /(𝜋 2 𝐸)
𝑟𝑦

2
3500
= 250 × /(𝜋 2 × 2 × 105)
28.2
= 1.3968
 𝜙 = 0.5 1 + 𝛼 𝜆 − 0.2 + 𝜆2

= 0.5 1 + 0.34 1.3968 − 0.2 + 1.39682 =1.679

𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0
𝑓𝑐𝑑 =
𝜙 + [𝜙 2 − 𝜆2 ]0.5

250/1.1
= = 87.06N/mm2
1.679:[1.6792 ;1.39682 ]0.5

The same may be obtained by using Table 9b of IS 800 :2007.

𝐾𝐿𝑦 3500
Thus, for = = 124.11 and 𝑓𝑦 = 250 Mpa, from Table 9b,
𝑟𝑦 28.2

91.7;81
We get 𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 91.7 − × 4.11 = 87.3 N/mm2
10
d) Design stresses:
About zz direction,
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 225.2N/mm2
About yydirection,
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 87.06N/mm2
Hence, design axial compressive stress,

𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 87.06N/mm2

The design strength,

𝑃𝑑 = 7846 × 87.06 × 10;3

= 683.07 kN
Example: Calculate the compressive strength of a compound
column consisting of ISHB 250 @ 54.7 kg/m with one cover
plate of 300×16 mm on each flange (as shown in the figure) and
having a length of 4 m. Assume that the bottom of the column is
fixed and top is hinged and 𝑓𝑦 =250 N/mm2

y Cover plate-300×16

ISHB 250
z z

125 mm 𝑦1

16 mm
y
Solution:
Properties of ISHB 250 @ 54.7 kg/m : [Table I SP:6(1)-1964]
C/S area, A = 6971 mm2
𝐼𝑧𝑧 =7983.9 ×104 mm4
𝐼𝑦𝑦 =2011.7 ×104mm4
𝑡𝑓 = 9.7 mm
a) Determination the radii of gyration for the compound section:

𝐼𝑧 for plates = 2 𝐼𝑎 + 𝐴𝑝 𝑦12

300 × 163 2
=2 + 300 × 16 × 125 + 8
12
= 17001.92 × 104 mm4
Total 𝐼𝑧 = 7983.9 ×104 + 17001.92 × 104
= 24985.82 × 104 mm4
Area of the built-up section = 6971 + 2 × 300 × 16
= 16571 mm2
𝐼𝑧 24985.82×104
𝑟𝑧 = = = 122.79 mm
𝐴 16571

16×3003
𝐼𝑦 of plates = 2 × = 7200 × 104 mm4
12

Total 𝐼𝑦 = 2011.7 ×104 + 7200 × 104 = 9211.7 × 104 mm4

𝐼𝑦 9211.7×104
𝑟𝑦 = = = 74.56mm
𝐴 16571

∴ 𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 74.56 mm
b) Buckling curve classification:
From Table 10 of IS 800 :2007, for built up section buckling
class is ‘c’ about any axis.
c) Design strength:
Effective length of the column (Table 11 of IS 800 :2007)
= 0.8𝐿 = 0.8 × 4 × 103 = 3200 mm
𝐾𝐿 3200
∴ 𝜆= = = 42.92
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛 74.56

From table 9c of IS 800 :2007, for 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa and 𝜆 =42.92

198;183
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 198 − × 2.92 = 193.62 N/mm2
10
Hence, design strength = 193.62 × 16571 × 10;3
= 3208.48kN
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
OF ANGLE STRUTS
 Angle Struts
(Cl. 7.5 of IS 800 :2007)

1. Single Angle Struts ( Cl. 7.5.1 IS 800 :2007):

The compression in single angles may be transferred either
concentrically to its centroid through end gusset or
eccentrically by one of its leg to a gusset or adjacent member.

 Concentric loading: ( Cl. 7.5.1.1 IS 800 2007)

When a single angle is concentrically loaded in compression,
the design strength may be evaluated as per clause 7.1.2 of IS
800 :2007.
 Loaded through one leg ( Cl. 7.5.1.2 of IS 800 :2007)
When the single angle is loaded concentrically through one leg of
its legs, the flexural torsional buckling strength may be evaluated
using an equivalent slenderness ratio 𝜆𝑒 given by
𝜆𝑒 = 𝑘1 + 𝑘2 𝜆2𝑣𝑣 + 𝑘3 𝜆2𝜙

Where 𝑘1 , 𝑘2 , 𝑘3 = constants depending upon the end condition

as per Table 12 of IS 800-2007.

𝑙/𝑟𝑣𝑣
𝜆𝑣𝑣 =
𝜀 𝜋 2 𝐸/250

(𝑏1 + 𝑏2 )/2𝑡
𝜆𝜙 =
𝜀 𝜋 2 𝐸/250
Where, l = centre to centre length of the supporting member
𝑟𝑣𝑣 = radius of gyration about minor axis
𝑏1 , 𝑏2 = width of two legs of the angle
t = thickness of the leg
ε = yield stress ratio, 𝜀 = 250/𝑓𝑦

Table 12: Constants k1, k2, k3 (IS 800:2007)

No. of bolts at the Gusset/Connecting

k1 k2 k3
end of member member fixity
Fixed 0.2 0.35 20
≥2
Hinged 0.7 0.60 5
Fixed 0.75 0.35 20
1
Hinged 1.25 0.50 60
Example: An ISA 150×150×12 used as a strut has the effective
length as 3 m. Calculate the strength when it is connected by
a) One bolt at each end
b) Two bolts at each end
c) Welded at each end

Solution:
For ISA 150×150×12, A = 3459 mm2, [Table III, SP:6(1)-1964]
rvv = 29.3 mm

For angle sections, Buckling curve ‘c’ is used. [Table 10, IS 800:2007]

Imperfection factor, α = 0.49 [Table 7, IS 800:2007]

a) Connected by one bolt at each end:

Assuming fixed conditions, for one bolt at each end,

k1 = 0.75, k2 = 0.35, k3 = 20 [Table 12, IS 800:2007]
c/c length, l = 3000 mm

Yield stress ratio, 𝜀 = 250/𝑓𝑦 = 250/250 = 1

[cl.7.5.1.2 of IS 800:2007]

𝑙/𝑟𝑣𝑣 3000/29.3
𝜆𝑣𝑣 = = = 1.1523
𝜀 𝜋 2 𝐸/250 1× 𝜋2 ×2× 105 /250
 150+150
(𝑏1 :𝑏2 )/2𝑡 2×12
𝜆𝜙 = = = 0.1407
𝜀 𝜋2 𝐸/250 1× 𝜋2 ×2×105 /250

Hence, 𝜆𝑒 = 𝑘1 + 𝑘2 𝜆2𝑣𝑣 + 𝑘3 𝜆2𝜙

= 0.75 + 0.35 × 1.15232 + 20 × 0.14072

= 1.2692

𝜙 = 0.5[1 + 𝛼 𝜆 − 0.2 + 𝜆2 ]
= 0.5[1 + 0.49 × 1.2692 − 0.2 + 1.26922 ]
= 1.5674
 𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0
𝑓𝑐𝑑 =
∅:[∅2 ;𝜆2 ]0.5
250/1.1
=
1.5674:[1.5674 2 ;1.26922 ]0.5

= 91.38 N/mm2

𝑃𝑑 = 𝐴𝑒 𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 3459×91.38× 10;3 = 316.1 kN

b) Connected by two bolts at each end:

Assuming fixed conditions, for two bolts at each end,

k1 = 0.2, k2 = 0.35, k3 = 20 [Table 12, IS 800:2007]
Effective length, l = 3000 mm ; 𝜀=1
𝜆𝑣𝑣 = 1.1523
𝜆𝜙 = 0.1407

𝜆𝑒 = 0.2 + 0.35 × 1.15232 + 20 × 0.14072

= 1.03
 𝜙 = 0.5[1 + 𝛼 𝜆 − 0.2 + 𝜆2 ]
= 0.5 1 + 0.49 × 1.03 − 0.2 + 1.032
= 1.2338

𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0
𝑓𝑐𝑑 =
∅:[∅2 ;𝜆2 ]0.5
250/1.1
= = 118.8 N/mm2
1.2338:[1.23382 ;1.032 ]0.5

𝑃𝑑 = 𝐴𝑒 𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 3459×118.8× 10;3 = 410.9 kN

c) Connected by weld at each end:

This case will be exactly similar to earlier case, i.e., Connected by
two bolts at each end. Therefore,
𝑃𝑑 = 410.9 kN
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
OF DOUBLE ANGLES
Effective length for Double Angle Struts:(Cl. 7.5.2 IS 800:2007)

The effective length, KL, in the plane of end gusset shall be taken as
between 0.7 and 0.85 times the distance between intersections,
depending on the degree of the restraint provided. The effective
length, KL, in the plane perpendicular to that of the end gusset, shall
be taken as equal to the distance between centres of intersections.
Example: A discontinuous strut of length 4 m consists of two
unequal angles ISA 100×75×8 and is connected to a 10 mm thick
gusset plate by its longer leg. Determine the strength if it is
connected on the:
i) Opposite side of the gusset plate
ii) Same side of the gusset plate
Solution:
Properties of ISA 100×75×8 : [Table IV, SP:6(1)-1964]
A= 1336 mm2
rx = 31.4 mm ry = 21.8 mm
ru = 34.8 mm rv = 15.9 mm
Cx = 31.0 mm Cy = 18.7 mm
Ix = 131.6×104 mm4 Iy = 63.3×104 mm4
i) Angles placed on opposite sides of the gusset plate:

For double angle struts

𝐴′ = 2×1336 = 2672 mm2
𝑟𝑥′ = 31.4 mm (same as for single angle)
2
𝐼𝑦′ = 2 𝐼𝑦 + 𝐴 𝑐𝑦 + 𝑡𝑔 /2

= 2 × 63.3×104 + 1336 × 18.7 + 10/2 2

= 276.68×104 𝑚𝑚4
 𝐼𝑦′ 276.68×104
𝑟𝑦′ = = = 32.18 𝑚𝑚
𝐴′ 2672

Hence, 𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛 = min 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑥′ 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑟𝑦′ = 31.4 𝑚𝑚

Effective Length, 𝑙𝑒 = 0.85 𝑙 = 0.85 × 4 = 3.4 𝑚 [Cl. 7.5.2.1, IS 800]

𝑙𝑒
Slenderness Ratio, λ =
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛

3.4 × 1000
= = 108.28 < 180 [table 3, IS 800 2007]
31.4

Hence, the section is ok.

Buckling class for angle section – ‘c’ [Table 10, IS 800 :2007]
For 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa and 𝜆 = 108.28 and buckling class c, using
Table 9(c) of IS 800 :2007, we have
107−94.6
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 107 − × 8.28 = 96.73 MPa
10

Hence strength of the member = 96.73 × 2672 × 10−3

= 258.46 𝑘𝑁
ii) Angle placed on the same side of the gusset plate

𝐴′ = 2672 mm2
𝑟𝑦′ = 21.8 mm (same as for single angle)

𝐼𝑥′ = 2 𝐼𝑥 + 𝐴𝐶𝑥 2
= 2 × 131.6×104 + 1336 × 312
= 519.98×104 𝑚𝑚4
 𝐼𝑥′ 519.98×104
𝑟𝑥′ = = = 44. 11 𝑚𝑚
𝐴′ 2672

Hence, 𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛 = min 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑥′ 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑟𝑦′ = 21.8 𝑚𝑚

Effective Length, 𝑙𝑒 = 0.85 𝑙 = 0.85 × 4 = 3.4 𝑚 [cl. 7.5.2.1, IS 800]

𝑙𝑒
Slenderness Ratio, λ =
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛

3.4 × 1000
= = 155.96 < 180 [table 3, IS 800 2007]
21.8

Hence, the section is ok.

Buckling class for angle section – ‘c’ [table 10, IS 800 :2007]
For 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa and 𝜆 = 155.96 and buckling class c, using table
9(c) of IS 800 :2007, we have
59.2−53.3
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 59.2 − × 5.96 = 55.68 MPa
10

Hence strength of the member = 55.68 × 2672 × 10−3

= 148.78 𝑘𝑁

Strength of the member when Angles placed on

(i) Opposite sides of the gusset plate: 258.46 𝑘𝑁

(ii) Same side of the gusset plate: 148.78 𝑘𝑁
 DESIGN OF
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
 Steps for design of compression members:
1) Assume a suitable design compression stress (𝑓𝑐𝑑 ) as 0.4fy
to 0.6 fy.
𝑃𝑑
2) Effective sectional area required is, 𝐴𝑒 =
𝑓𝑐𝑑

3) A section is to be selected which gives effective area required

and then calculate rmin.

4) Determine effective length, knowing the end conditions and by

deciding the type of connection.
5) Determine the slenderness ratio and hence design stress fcd and
load carrying capacity Pd.
6) Modify the section if calculated Pd differs significantly from the
design load.
Slenderness ratio to be assumed while selecting the
trial section:

Type of member Slenderness Ratio (l/r)

Single angles 100-150
Single channels 90-150
Double angles 80-120
Double channels 40-80
Single I-sections 80-150
Double I-sections 30-60

•Compute KL/r for the section selected & check for

slenderness ratio.
Example: Design a compression member carrying an axial load of
250kN. The effective length of the member is 3 m. Design the
member with 2 equal angles in star orientation as shown in the figure
below.
y
10 mm
v u

x x

u v
y
Solution:
Assuming 𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 0.5𝑓𝑦 = 0.5 × 250 = 125 𝑀𝑃𝑎

250×1000
Required area = = 2000 𝑚𝑚2
125

Selecting 2 ISA 90×90×6 with the following properties

[Table III, SP:6(1)-1964]

𝐴 = 1047 𝑚𝑚2

𝑐𝑥 = 𝑐𝑦 = 24.2 𝑚𝑚 𝑟𝑥 = 𝑟𝑦 = 27.7 𝑚𝑚

𝑟𝑢 = 35 𝑚𝑚 𝑟𝑣 = 17.5 𝑚𝑚

𝐴′ = 2 × 1047 = 2094 𝑚𝑚2

Assuming 10 mm gusset plate.

 𝑡𝑔 2
We know, 𝐼𝑥′ = 2 𝐼𝑥 + 𝐴 𝐶𝑥 +
2

𝑡𝑔 2
𝑟𝑥′ = 𝑟𝑦′ = 2
𝑟𝑥 + 𝑐𝑥 +
2

= 27.72 + (24.2 + 10
2
) 2 = 40.25 𝑚𝑚

𝑡𝑔 2
𝑟𝑣′ = 2
𝑟𝑣 + 2 𝑐𝑦 +
2

= 17.52 + 2 × (24.2 + 10
2
)2 = 44.85 𝑚𝑚

𝑟𝑢′ = 𝑟𝑢 = 35 𝑚𝑚, Hence, 𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 35 𝑚𝑚

Effective Length, 𝑙𝑒 = 0.85 𝑙 = 0.85 × 3000 [cl. 7.5.2.1, IS 800]

= 2550 𝑚𝑚
 𝑙𝑒 2550
So 𝜆 = = = 72.86 < 180 hence safe.
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛 35

For 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa and 𝜆 = 72.86 and buckling class c,

using table 9(c) of IS 800 :2007, we have

152−136
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 152 − × 2.86 = 147.42 MPa
10

Hence strength of the member = 147.42 × 2094 × 10−3

= 308.7 𝑘𝑁 > 250 𝑘𝑁

Hence the member is safe.

Tack welding:
Tack welding should be provided along the length to avoid local
buckling of each of the elements
𝜆𝑒 ≤ 0.6𝜆 = 0.6 × 72.86 = 43.716 or 40, whichever is less
(clause 7.8.1)
So, 𝜆𝑒 = 𝑆/𝑟𝑣 = 40
Hence, spacing between welds, 𝑆 = 40 × 𝑟𝑣 (Min r of the
individual member) = 40 × 17.5 = 700 𝑚𝑚
Welding is designed to resist a transverse load (P) of 2.5% of
axial load = 2.5 × 250/100 = 6.25 𝑘𝑁
Using 5 mm weld size (shop weld)
𝑃 6.25×103
Hence length of weld = 𝑡𝑒 𝑓𝑢 = 0.7×5×410 = 9.43 mm
3𝛾𝑚𝑤 3×1.25

Hence provide a 5mm tack welding of 10 mm length at 700 mm

spacing.
 Design of Compression Member using GUI in
MATLAB

Example: Design a single angle discontinuous

strut to carry a factored load of 50 kN. Assume
that the distance between its joints is 2 m. Use
𝑓𝑦 = 250 Mpa.
 DESIGN OF BUILT UP
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
 Why Built-up Sections?
A built up compression member are those which
consist of two or more rolled steel sections. The
reasons for built-up columns are follows: -

1. The built up sections provide large cross-sectional

area which cannot be furnished by single rolled steel
section.
2. The built up sections provide special shape &
depth. The special shape & depth facilitate
connections between different members.

3. The built up sections provide sufficient large radius

of gyration in two different directions.
4. As larger radius of gyration is capable of handling
more stress thereby requiring lesser area. which
ultimately leads to an economic design.
Examples of Built-up Sections
Channel Back to Back
Channel Face to Face
I Section with Chanel at Top
Double I Section
I Section with Plates
Star Angle
Design of built-up compression member
Step1: -
Find the effective length from the actual length & end
conditions
Step2: -
Assume value of λ between 30-60 for the built section.
Step3: -
Find design compressive stress (𝑓𝑐𝑑) from Table 9(C) of
IS:800-2007 for the given value of λ

Step4: -
𝑃
Find the area as 𝐴 =
𝑓𝑐𝑑
Step5: -
Choose a built-up section so that the total area becomes more
than the required area calculated in step 4. Also, arrange the
members in such that the values of Izz will become close to Iyy.

Step6: -
With the above arrangement, find rmin and then calculate λ.

Step7: -
From Table 9(C) find the value of 𝑓 𝑐𝑑 and then the design
compressive strength 𝑃𝑑 . If 𝑃𝑑 >P then OK, otherwise chose a
higher section & repeat the Steps 5-7
Example: Design a laced column 10.5 m long to carry factored
axial load of 1000 kN. The column is restrained in position but
not in direction at both the ends. Use 2 channel section placed as
back to back as shown in the figure below.
Solution:
For steel of grade Fe 410:
𝑓𝑢 = 410 MPa, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa
Design of column:
𝑃 = 1000 kN = 1000 × 103 N
L = 1.0 × 10.5 = 10.5 m
Let the design axial compressive stress for the column be
150 MPa
1000×103
Required area = = 6666.67 mm2
150
Let us try two ISMC 250 @ 298.2 N/m.
Relevant properties of ISMC 250 [ Table II SP 6 (1): 1964]
𝐴 = 3867 mm2, 𝑟𝑧𝑧 = 99.4 mm,
𝑟𝑦𝑦 = 23.8 mm 𝑡𝑓 = 14.1 mm
𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 3816.8 × 104 mm4 𝐼𝑦𝑦 = 219.1 × 104 mm4
𝑐𝑦𝑦 = 23 mm 𝑏 = 80 mm
Area provided = 2 × 3867 = 7734 mm2

In the design of built-up column with two sections, the sections

are so spaced that the least radius of gyration of the built-up
section becomes as large a value as possible. Therefore, the
radius of gyration about y-y axis is increased so that it becomes
equal to or more than the radius of gyration about z-z axis. This
can be achieved by spacing the sections in such a way that 𝑟𝑧𝑧
becomes 𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛 . Let us first check the safety of the section.
 𝐿 10.5 × 103
= = 105.63
𝑟𝑧𝑧 99.4
As per clause 7.6.1.5 of IS 800:2007,
𝐾𝐿
The effective slenderness ratio, = 1.05 × 105.63
𝑟 𝑒
= 110.91 < 180
𝐾𝐿
For = 110.91, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa and buckling class c, the
𝑟 𝑒
design compressive stress from Table 9c of IS 800 :2007
94.6−83.7
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 94.6 − × 0.91 = 93.61 MPa
10

Therefore load carrying capacity = 𝐴𝑒 𝑓𝑐𝑑

= 7734 × 93.61 × 10−3
= 723.98 kN < 1000 kN
Which is not safe.
Try two ISMC 300 @ 351.2 N/m
Relevant properties of ISMC 300 [ Table II SP 6 (1): 1964]
𝐴 = 4564 mm2, 𝑟𝑧𝑧 = 118.1 mm,
𝑟𝑦𝑦 = 26.1 mm 𝑡𝑓 = 13.6 mm
𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 6362.6 × 104 mm4 𝐼𝑦𝑦 = 310.8 × 104 mm4
𝑐𝑦𝑦 = 23.6 mm 𝑏 = 90 mm
Area provided = 2 × 4564 = 9128 mm2
𝐿 10.5 × 103
= = 88.91
𝑟𝑧𝑧 118.1
As per clause 7.6.1.5 of IS 800:2007,
𝐾𝐿
The effective slenderness ratio, = 1.05 × 88.91
𝑟 𝑒
= 93.35 < 180
 𝐾𝐿
For = 93.35, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa and buckling class c, the
𝑟 𝑒
design compressive stress from Table 9c of IS 800 :2007
121−107
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 121 − × 3.35 = 116.31 Mpa
10

Therefore load carrying capacity = 𝐴𝑒 𝑓𝑐𝑑

= 9128 × 116.31 × 10−3
= 1061.68 kN > 1000 kN
Which is safe.

Let us provide two channels back-to-back.

Spacing of channels:
𝑆 2
2𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 2 𝐼𝑦𝑦 + 𝐴 + 𝐶𝑦𝑦
2
𝑆 2
or 2 × 6362.6 × 104 = 2 × 310.8 × 104 + 4564 + 23.6
2
𝑆 2
or + 23.6 = 13259.86
2
⇒ 𝑆 = 183.1 mm
Let us keep the channels at a spacing of 184 mm

ISMC 300

S=184 mm
LACING SYSTEM
 Laced Column (Clause 7.6 IS 800 :2007)
Lacings are the most commonly used lateral system in built–up
compression members. Apart from flat bars other common
sections used are angles, channels and tubular sections. Lacing
may be of two types:-
(a) Single Lacing
(b) Double Lacing

Single Lacing Double Lacing

Failure Modes of Latticed Compression Members

1. Buckling of built-up member as a whole

2. Buckling of main component
3. Distortion of the section
4. Failure of Lattice member

1. Failure as a whole 2. Failure of main component

 Failure Modes of Latticed Compression Members

3. Distortion of Cross section 4. Failure of Lacing

 General requirements
Clause 7.6 of IS: 800-2007
Compression members comprising of two main components
laced & tied should where practicable, have a radius of gyration
about the axis perpendicular to the plane of lacing not less than
the radius of gyration about the axis in the plane of lacing.

Ref: IS 800 :2007

As far as practicable lacing system shall not be varied
throughout the length of the strut.
Single laced system on opposite sides of the components shall
preferably be in the same direction so that one be the shadow of
the other, instead of being mutually opposed in direction.

Face A Face B
Face A Face B
Preferred Not Preferred
Ref: IS 800 :2007
Double lacing system & single lacing system on opposite sides
of the main components shall not be combined with cross
members perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the strut
unless all forces resulting from deformation of the strut
members are calculated & provided for in the lacing &
fastenings.

Ref: IS 800 :2007

 Design Specifications
1. Force in lacing:
The lacing of compression members shall be proportioned to
resist a total transverse shear V at any point in the length of the
member equal to at least 2.5% of the axial force in the member,
which shear shall be considered as divided equally among all
transverse lacing systems in parallel planes.

2.5
Thus the total transverse shear force, 𝑉 = ×𝑃
100
Where, P is the axial force in the members
For single lacing system of
two parallel faces the force
on each bar:
𝑉 𝑉
𝐹= =
𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 2𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃
n = No. of transverse
system in parallel plane

For double lacing:

𝑉
𝐹=
4𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃
Single lacing Double lacing
This force will be tensile in
one lacing bar &
compressive in the other
The slenderness ratio 𝑙𝑒 /𝑟 of the lacing bars should not exceed
145. The effective length of lacing bars should be taken as
follows:-

Types of welding Effective length

Single lacing (bolted at Length between inner end bolts on

ends) lacing bar i.e. (le =l)

Double lacing, (bolted

0.7 times the length between inner end
at ends & at
bolts on lacing bars i.e. (le =0.7l)
intersections)

0.7 time the distance between inner

Welded lacing ends of lengths of welds at ends i.e.
(le =0.7l)
For flat bars of thickness t and width b:
The slenderness ratio will be:
𝑙𝑒 𝑙𝑒 𝑙𝑒 𝑙𝑒 12
𝜆= = = =
𝑟 𝐼/𝐴 3
𝑏𝑡 /12 𝑡
𝑏𝑡

𝑙𝑒 12
∴ 𝜆𝑙𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = < 145
𝑡

2. Width of Lacing Bars

In riveted/bolted connection, the minimum width of lacing bars

should be more than three times the nominal diameter of the
end connector.
3. Thickness of Lacing Bars
The minimum thickness of the flat lacing bars should be as
follows:
𝑙
𝑡> for single lacing
40
𝑙
𝑡> for double lacing
60
Where, l is the length between the inner end bolts or welds

4. Angle of Inclination
Lacing bars, whether in double or single systems, shall be
inclined at an angle not less than 400 nor more than 700 to the
axis of the member.
5. Spacing: The maximum spacing of lacing bars should be
such that minimum slenderness ratio will be,

𝐿
𝑐 = 0.7𝜆𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛
which ever is minimum
= 50
Where, 𝜆𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the maximum slenderness ratio of the
compression member as a whole
L = Distance between centers of connections of the
lattice bars to each component
𝑐
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛 = Minimum radius of gyration of the component
of compression members
6. Attachment to the main members:

The riveting, bolting or welding of the lacing bars to the main

member should be sufficient to transmit the load in the bar.

Welded Connection:
Where welded lacing bars overlap the main members, the
amount of lap measured along either edge of the lacing bar
shall be not less than four times the thickness of the bar or the
members, whichever is less.

The welding should be sufficient to transmit the load in the bar

and shall, in any case, be provided along each side of the bar
for the full length of lap.
Where lacing bars are fitted between the main members, they
shall be connected to each member by fillet welds on each side
of the bar or by full penetration butt welds. The lacing bars shall
be so placed as to be generally opposite the flange or stiffening
elements of the main member.

Bolted connection:
𝐹
For first case, the numbers of bolt, 𝑛 =
𝑅
For second case, the numbers of bolt,
𝑅𝑒𝑠𝑢𝑙𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝐹𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 2𝐹𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃
𝑛= =
𝐵𝑜𝑙𝑡 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑅
Where, F = Force in lacing bar
𝜃 = Inclination
DESIGN OF LACING
SYSTEM
 Design Steps

Step 1: -
Choose the lacing system i.e. either single lacing or double
lacing. Choose the angle of inclination with the axis of the
compression member.

Step 2: -
For a given shape, find out gauge distance g on each side
& find the distance a between the bolt center. Then
compute the spacing
Thus according to the figure,
a = 2g + S
S = Clear spacing

2𝑎
𝐿= For single lacing
𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃
𝑎
= For double lacing
𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃

𝑎
𝑙= For both single and double lacing
𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃
Step 3: -
Find the slenderness ratio of each component & check for
slenderness ratio
𝐿
𝑐 = 0.7𝜆𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛
= 50
Step 4: -
Find the length l of each lacing between the inner end bolts
and then find the effective length, le.

For single lacing system (bolted ends), le = l

Double lacing system (bolted ends), le = 0.7l
For welded lacing system, le = 0.7l
 Step 5: -
Select thickness t of lacings consisting of flats.
𝑙
𝑡> for single lacing
40
𝑙
𝑡> for double lacing
60
Step 6: -
Calculate maximum slenderness ratio of lacing and check
whether it is less than 145. For flats,
𝑙𝑒 12
∴ 𝜆𝑙𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = < 145
𝑡

Step 7: -
Calculate the compressive strength

Step 8: -
Calculate transverse shear, V = 0.025P and then force, F in each
lacing.
Step 9: -
Compute developed compressive and tensile stress in lacing
which should be less than the permissible compressive and
tensile stresses.

Step 10: -
Select bolt diameter and then find minimum width, b of the
flats. The no. of bolt required can be found from equation:
𝐹
𝑛=
𝑅

Step 11: -
Design the end connections for lacing system. Check if the
no. of bolts are sufficient to withstand the load in the
member.
Example: Design a laced column 10.5 m long to carry factored
axial load of 1000 kN. The column is restrained in position but not
in direction at both the ends. Provide single lacing system. Use 2
channel section placed as back to back. Assume steel of grade Fe
410 and bolts of grade 4.6.
a) Design the lacing system with bolted connections
b) Design the lacing system with site welded connections.
Solution: The first part of this example is demonstrated in lecture
no. 35 to find size of the of the channel section and spacing. The
size of the sections was ISMC 300 and are placed back to back
with a spacing of 184 mm as shown in the figure below.

Design of lacing system:

Let use a single lacing system with inclination of lacing bar = 45°
Assume gauge length = 50 mm
Spacing of lacing bar, 𝐿0 = 2 × 184 + 50 + 50 𝑐𝑜𝑡45° = 568 mm
𝐿0 /𝑟𝑦𝑦 should be < 0.7 × 𝐿/𝑟 of whole column [cl. 7.6.5.1 of IS
800 :2007]
𝐿0 568
= = 21.76 < 0.7 × 93.35 = 65.34
𝑟𝑦𝑦 26.1
𝐿/𝑟 = 93.35 has been calculated in lecture no. 35
Hence safe.

2.5
Maximum shear, 𝑉 = × 1000 × 103 (cl. 7.6.6.1 IS 800 :2007)
100
= 25000 N
𝑉 25000
Transverse shear in each panel = = = 12500 N
𝑁 2

Compressive force in lacing bars (F) = 𝑉 /𝑁 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐45°

= 12500 × 1.414
= 17675 N = 17.67 kN
Lacing flats:
Let us provide 16 mm diameter bolts
Minimum width of lacing flat (cl. 7.6.2 IS 800 :2007)
= 3 × 16 = 48 mm
Let us provide 50 mm wide flats.
Length of lacing flat (l) = 184 + 50 + 50 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐45° = 401.6=402
mm
Minimum thickness of lacing flat (cl. 7.6.3 IS 800 :2007)
1
= ×length of flat between inner end bolts.
40
1
= × 402
40
= 10.05 mm
Provide 12 mm thick plate with a width of 50 mm.
𝑡 12
Minimum radius of gyration, 𝑟 = = = 3.464 mm
12 12
 402
𝑙/𝑟 of lacing bar = = 116 < 145
3.464
Hence, ok
𝑙
For = 116, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa and buckling class c, the design
𝑟

compressive stress from Table 9c of IS 800 :2007

94.6−83.7
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 94.6 − × 6 = 88.06 MPa
10

Design compressive strength, 𝑃𝑑 = 𝐴𝑒 𝑓𝑐𝑑

= 12 × 50 × 88.06 × 10−3
= 52.84 kN > 17.67 kN
OK
The tensile strength of flat is minimum of
(cl. 6.2 and 6.3.1 of IS 800: 2007)
𝐵−𝑑ℎ 𝑡𝑓𝑢 (50−18)×12×410
i) 0.9 × = 0.9 × × 10−3 = 113.36 kN
𝛾𝑚1 1.25
and
𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑦 (50×12)×250
ii) = × 10−3 = 136.363 kN
𝛾𝑚0 1.1

Hence, the tensile strength of the flat is (minimum of 113.36 kN

and 136.36 kN) 113.36 kN > 17.67 kN

Hence, safe.
CONNECTION DESIGN
OF LACING SYSTEM
Example: Design a laced column 10.5 m long to carry factored
axial load of 1000 kN. The column is restrained in position but not
in direction at both the ends. Provide single lacing system. Use 2
channel section placed as back to back. Assume steel of grade Fe
410 and bolts of grade 4.6.
a) Design the lacing system with bolted connections
b) Design the lacing system with site welded connections.
Solution: The first part of this example is demonstrated in lecture
no. 35 to find size of the of the channel section and spacing. The
size of the sections was ISMC 300 and are placed back to back
with a spacing of 184 mm as shown in the figure below.

Design of lacing system:

Let use a single lacing system with inclination of lacing bar = 45°
Assume gauge length = 50 mm
Spacing of lacing bar, 𝐿0 = 2 × 184 + 50 + 50 𝑐𝑜𝑡45° = 568 mm
𝐿0 /𝑟𝑦𝑦 should be < 0.7 × 𝐿/𝑟 of whole column [cl. 7.6.5.1 of IS
800 :2007]
𝐿0 568
= = 21.76 < 0.7 × 93.35 = 65.34
𝑟𝑦𝑦 26.1
𝐿/𝑟 = 93.35 has been calculated in lecture no. 35
Hence safe.

2.5
Maximum shear, 𝑉 = × 1000 × 103 (cl. 7.6.6.1 IS 800 :2007)
100
= 25000 N
𝑉 25000
Transverse shear in each panel = = = 12500 N
𝑁 2

Compressive force in lacing bars = 𝑉 /𝑁 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐45°

= 12500 × 1.414
= 17675 N = 17.67 kN
Lacing flats:
Let us provide 16 mm diameter bolts
Minimum width of lacing flat (cl. 7.6.2 IS 800 :2007)
= 3 × 16 = 48 mm
Let us provide 50 mm wide flats.
Length of lacing flat = 184 + 50 + 50 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐45° = 401.6=402
mm
Minimum thickness of lacing flat (cl. 7.6.3 IS 800 :2007)
1
= ×length of flat between inner end bolts.
40
1
= × 402
40
= 10.05 mm
Provide 12 mm thick plate with a width of 50 mm.
𝑡 12
Minimum radius of gyration, 𝑟 = = = 3.464 mm
12 12
 402
𝑙/𝑟 of lacing bar = = 116 < 145
3.464
Hence, ok
𝑙
For = 116, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa and buckling class c, the design
𝑟

compressive stress from Table 9c of IS 800 :2007

94.6−83.7
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 94.6 − × 6 = 88.06 MPa
10

Design compressive strength, 𝑃𝑑 = 𝐴𝑒 𝑓𝑐𝑑

= 12 × 50 × 88.06 × 10−3
= 52.84 kN > 17.67 kN
OK
The tensile strength of flat is minimum of
(cl. 6.2 and 6.3.1 of IS 800: 2007)
𝐵−𝑑ℎ 𝑡𝑓𝑢 (50−18)×12×410
i) 0.9 × = 0.9 × × 10−3 = 113.36 kN
𝛾𝑚1 1.25
and
𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑦 (50×12)×250
ii) = × 10−3 = 136.363 kN
𝛾𝑚0 1.1

Hence, the tensile strength of the flat is (minimum of 113.36 kN

and 136.36 kN) 113.36 kN > 17.67 kN

Hence, safe.
a) Bolted connection (If lacings are not over lapped each other)
Assuming that the 16 mm bolts of grade 4.6 are connecting both
the lacing flats with the channel at one point and that the shear
plane will not pass through the threaded portion of bolt.
Strength of bolt in single shear = 𝐴𝑠𝑏 𝑓𝑢 / 3 /𝛾𝑚𝑏

𝜋×162 400
= × /1.25
4 3

= 37147 N
Minimum pitch, p  2.5 d  2.5  16  40
Minimum end distance, e = 1.5 d0 =1.5×18=27 mm
Provide p=50 mm and e= 30 mm
kb is smaller of 30/(3×18), 50/(3×18)-0.25, 400/410, 1

Kb = 0.56
Strength in bearing = 2.5𝑘𝑏 𝑑𝑡𝑓𝑢 /𝛾𝑚𝑏
410
= 2.5 × 0.56 × 16 × 12 × = 88167 N
1.25
Hence, strength of bolt = 37147 N = 37 kN

No of bolts required = 17.67/37 = 0.5 ≈ 1

Hence, provide one bolt at each end.
b) Bolted connection (If lacings are over lapped each other)
Assuming that the 16 mm bolts of grade 4.6 are connecting both
the lacing flats with the channel at one point and that the shear
plane will not pass through the threaded portion of bolt.
Strength of bolt in double shear = 2 × 𝐴𝑠𝑏 𝑓𝑢 / 3 /𝛾𝑚𝑏
= 74294N
Strength in bearing = 2.5𝑘𝑏 𝑑𝑡𝑓𝑢 /𝛾𝑚𝑏 (let 𝑘𝑏 as 0.49)
410
= 2.5 × 0.56 × 16 × 12 × = 88167N
1.25
Hence, strength of bolt = 74294 N = 74 kN

No of bolts required = 2 × 𝑉 /𝑁 𝑐𝑜𝑡45° =2 × 12500 ×cot45°

=25/37 = 0.7 ≈ 1
Hence, provide one bolt at each end.
Tie plate(cl. 7.7.2.2 IS 800 :2007):
Tie plates are provided at the ends of the laced column.
Effective depth = 184 + 2 × 𝐶𝑦𝑦 > 2𝑏
= 184 + 2 × 23.6 = 231.2 mm > 2 × 90 = 180
Which is all right.
Minimum edge distance for 16 mm diameter bolt
= 1.5 × 16 + 2 = 27 mm, say 30 mm
Overall depth of tie plate = 231.2 + 2 × 30 = 291.2 mm
Provide a tie plate of 300 mm depth.
Length of the tie plate = 𝑠 + 2𝑏 = 184 + 2 × 90 = 364 mm
1
Thickness of the tie plate = 184 + 2 × 50 = 5.68 mm
50
Hence, provide a tie plate of 6 mm thickness.
Provide a tie plate of size 364×300×6 mm at both ends with 16
mm diameter bolts as shown in the figure.
 568 mm
50 ISF 12 mm

ISMC 300

300 mm

184 mm

364 mm

300 mm

Lacing flats and tie plates are connected by bolts (overlapped each other)
b) Welded connection:
Flange thickness of ISMC 300 = 13.6 mm
Minimum size of weld for 13.6 mm thick member = 5 mm [Table
21 IS 800 :2007]
410
Strength of weld/unit length = 0.7 × 5 × = 552.33 N/mm
3×1.5

17670
Required length of weld = = 32 mm
552.33

Adding extra length for ends, the weld length to be provided

= 32 + 2 × 2 × 5 = 52 mm
Provide 100 mm weld length at both ends.
Tie plate:
Overall depth = 184 + 2 × 23.6 = 231.2 mm
Depth provided = 240 mm
Let length of the tie plate = 184 + 2 × 50 = 284 mm
1
Thickness of tie plate = × 284 = 5.68 mm
50

Provide a 8 mm plate to accommodate a 5 mm weld.

Provide a tie plate of size 283×240×8 mm size and connect it
with 5 mm welds as shown in the figure.
 50 ISF 12 mm

ISMC 300

184 mm

283 mm

300 mm

Lacing flats and tie plates are connected by welding

DESIGN OF DOUBLE
LACING SYSTEM
Example: Design a built-up double laced column with four
angles to support an axial load of 800 kN. The column is 14 m
long and both ends are fixed. Assume Fe 410 grade of steel.
Solution:
𝑃 = 800 × 103 N
𝐿𝑒 = 0.65𝐿 = 0.65 × 14 = 9.1 m
Assume a design stress of 150 MPa,
800×103
Required area = = 5333.33 mm2
150
Provide four angles ISA 90×90×8 mm.
The relevant properties of ISA 90×90×8 are (Table III, SP 6-1)
𝐴 = 1379 mm2 𝐶𝑧𝑧 = 𝐶𝑦𝑦 = 25.1 mm
𝑟𝑧𝑧 = 𝑟𝑦𝑦 = 27.5 mm 𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 𝐼𝑦𝑦 = 104.2 × 104 mm4
Area provided = 4 × 1379 = 5516 mm2
800×103
For 5516 mm2, the required 𝑓𝑐𝑑 = = 145.03 MPa
5516

From Table 9c of IS 800 :2007, (for 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa)

𝐿
allowable = 74.36
𝑟
Effective length of the laced column = 1.05 × 9.1 = 9.5 m
9.5×103
Required 𝑟 = = 127.76 mm
74.36

Moment of inertia of required section,

𝐼 = 𝐴𝑟 2 = 5516 × 127.762 = 90.03 × 106 mm4
Equating required and provided moment of inertia,
90.03 × 106 = 4 × 104.2 × 104 + 5516 𝑧 2
𝑧 = 124.76 mm
Spacing of angles 𝑆 = 2 × 𝑧 + 𝐶𝑧𝑧
= 2 × 124.76 + 25.1 = 299.72 mm
Therefore, provide 𝑆 = 300 mm
300 2
Now, 𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 𝐼𝑦𝑦 = 4 × 104.2 × 104 + 5516 − 25.1
2
= 90.22 × 106 mm4
90.22×106
𝑟= = 127.9 mm
5516

𝐿 9.5×103
= = 74.28
𝑟 127.9
 𝐿
From Table 9c of IS 800:2007, for = 74.28 and 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa
𝑟
152−136
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 152 − × 4.28 = 145.15 MPa
10
Capacity of the built-up column = 5516 × 145.15 × 10−3
= 800.65 kN > 800 kN
Hence, the column is safe.

Connecting system:
Let us provide a double lacing system with the lacing flats
inclined at 45° . Both are provided at the centre of the leg of
angle.
Spacing of lacing bar, 𝐿0 = 300 − 45 − 45 𝑐𝑜𝑡45°
= 210 mm
 𝐿0 210
= = 7.64 < 50
𝑟𝑦𝑦 27.5
It should also be less than 0.7 × 𝐿/𝑟 = 0.7 × 74.28
= 52 > 7.64

2.5
Shear force, 𝑉 = × 800 × 103 = 20000 N
100
𝑉 20000
Transverse shear in each panel = = = 10000 N
𝑁 2

As double lacing is provided,

𝑉
Compressive force in lacing bar = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐𝜃
2𝑁
20000
= 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐45°
2×2

= 7071.1 N
Section of lacing flat:
Let us provide 20 mm diameter bolts of grade 4.6.
Minimum width of flat = 3 × 20 = 60 mm (cl. 7.6.2, IS 800:2007)
Length of lacing flat = 300 − 45 − 45 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐45° = 297 mm

1
Minimum thickness of the lacing flat = × 297 = 4.95 mm
60
Provide a flat of size 60×6 mm.
𝑡 6
Minimum radius of gyration, 𝑟 = = = 1.73 mm
12 12

𝐿1 0.7×297
Slenderness ratio, = = 120.2 < 145
𝑟 1.73

Hence the flat is safe.

 𝐿1
For = 120.2 and 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa (Table 9c, IS 800:2007)
𝑟
83.7−74.3
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 83.7 − × 0.2 = 83.5 MPa
10

Capacity of lacing bar = 83.5 × 60 × 6 = 30060 N > 7071.1 N

Hence the lacing bar is safe.

The tensile strength of flat is minimum of (cl. 6.2 and 6.3.1 of IS 800:
2007)
𝐵−𝑑𝑕 𝑡𝑓𝑢 (60−22)×6×410
i) 0.9 × = 0.9 × × 10−3 = 67.3 kN
𝛾𝑚1 1.25
and
𝐴𝑔 𝑓𝑦 (60×6)×250
ii) = × 10−3 = 81.82 kN
𝛾𝑚0 1.1

Hence, tensile strength of lacing flat = 67.3 kN > 7.07 kN

Connections:
Strength of 20 mm diameter bolt in double shear (cl. 10.3.3, IS
800:2007)
𝑓𝑢𝑏 400
𝐴𝑛𝑏
3 3
=2× = 2 × 245 × = 90528 N
𝛾𝑚𝑏 1.25

Strength in bearing = 2.5𝑘𝑏 𝑑𝑡𝑓𝑢 /𝛾𝑚𝑏 (cl. 10.3.4, IS 800:2007)

𝑘𝑏 is smaller of
𝑒 35
= = 0.53 ,
3𝑑0 3 × 22
𝑝 50
− 0.25 = − 0.25 = 0.51
3𝑑0 3 × 22
𝑓𝑢𝑏 400
= = 0.98
𝑓𝑢 410

and 1.0
Hence 𝑘𝑏 = 0.51
410
∴ Strength in bearing = 2.5 × 0.51 × 20 × 6 × = 50184 N
1.25

Hence, the strength of bolt = 50184 𝑁 = 50.18 kN

2×7071.1×𝑐𝑜𝑡45°
Number of bolts = = 0.28
50184

Provide one 20 mm diameter bolt.

Tie plate:
Tie plates are to be provided at each end of the built-up column.
Effective depth of tie plate = 300 − 2 × 25.1
= 249.8 mm > 2×90 mm
Overall depth of tie plate = 249.8 + 2 × 𝑒
= 249.8 + 2 × 35 = 319.8 mm
Length of tie plate = 300 mm
1
Thickness of tie plate = × 300 − 45 − 45
50

= 4.2 mm
Provide 300×320×6 mm tie plate and connect it with bolts as
shown in figure.
BATTEN PLATES
 Batten

Batten plates are generally

used for axial load only. It
consists of flats or plates.
Angles, channels & I-sections
are also sometimes used as
battens. It connects the
components of the built-up
columns in two parallel
planes.
 General requirements
Clause 7.7 of IS: 800-2007

Clause 7.7.1.1
Compression members composed of two main
components battened should preferably have their two
main components of the same cross section and
symmetrically disposed about their major axis. Where
practicable, the compression members should have a
radius of gyration about the axis perpendicular to the
plane of the batten not less than the radius of gyration
about the axis in the plane of batten.
Clause 7.7.1.3
The battens shall be placed opposite each other at each end of
the member and points where the member is stayed in its
length and shall, as far as practicable, be spaced and
proportioned uniformly throughout. Number of battens shall
be such that the member is divided into not less than three
bays within its actual length from center to center of
connection.

Effective Slenderness ratio (7.7.1.4)

The effective slenderness ratio of the column is increased by
10% of the actual one.
 Design requirements
Clause 7.7.2 of IS: 800-2007

Forces in batten(Clause 7.7.2.1):

Battens shall be designed to carry bending moment &
shears arising from transverse shear force ‘V’ of 2.5% of
the total axial force on the whole compression member.

2.5
Therefore, the traverse shear, 𝑉 = ×𝑃
100

P is the axial force on the compression member.

Battens shall be of plates, angles, channels, or I-sections and at
their ends shall be bolted or welded to the main components so
as to resist simultaneously
𝑉 𝐶
a longitudinal shear 𝑉𝑏 = along the column axis and
𝑁𝑆

𝑉 𝐶
a moment 𝑀 = at each connection,
2𝑁

Where,
C = Center to center distance of battens longitudinally
N = No of parallel planes of battens
S = minimum transverse distance between the centroid
of the bolt group/welding connecting the batten to
the main member
𝑉 = The traverse shear force
 Batten plates are provided symmetrically.

 Batten plates should be provided at both the ends. They

should be provided at points where the member is
stayed in its length.

 The number of battens should be such that the member

is divided into not less than three bays. They should be
spaced and proportioned uniformly throughout.
Size: (Clause 7.7.2.3 IS 800 :2007)

Batten thickness:
The thickness of the batten (t) or the tie plates should not
be less than 1/50th (one fiftieth) of the distance between
the innermost connecting rivets/bolts or welds.

𝑎𝑖
𝑡𝑚𝑖𝑛 >
50
Where, 𝑎𝑖 = Distance between the innermost
connecting lines of rivets/bolts
or welds perpendicular to main
member
Batten depth:
The effective depth of battens d shall be taken as
distance between end rivets or end welds.

• d > 0.75a for intermediate battens

• d > a for end battens
• d > 2b for any battens

where d = effective depth of the batten

a = centroid distance of members
b = width of member in the plane of batten
Spacing of the batten (Clause 7.7.3 IS 800:2007)

The spacing of the battens (C) be such that the

slenderness ratio of the lesser main component over the
distance is not greater than 50 or 0.7 times the
slenderness ratio of the main member as a whole, about
the axis parallel to the batten

𝐶
𝑐 < 50 𝑜𝑟 0.7𝜆
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛
End connections (Clause 7.7.4 ):
Design the end connections to resist the longitudinal shear
force V1 and the moment M as calculated in earlier step.

• For welded connection: Lap > 4t

• Total length of weld at edge of batten >D/2

• Length of weld at each edge of batten < 1/3 total length

of weld required.

• Return weld along transverse axis of column < 4t.

 Design Steps
Step 1: -
2.5
Find the transverse shear 𝑉 = ×𝑃
100
Calculate longitudinal shear along the column axis as
𝑉 𝐶
𝑉𝑙 = and
𝑁𝑆

𝑉 𝐶
Calculate moment at each connection as 𝑀 = ,
2𝑁
Step 2: -
Calculate effective slenderness ratio (λe) as 1.1× λ

Step 3: -
For a given shape, find out gauge distance g on each side
& find the distance a between the bolt center.
Step 4: -
Calculate spacing of the batten plates (C) from the following
conditions:
𝐶
𝑐 < 50 𝑜𝑟 0.7𝜆
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛
Minimum 3 nos of batten should be provided along column length.
Step 5: -
Size of end battens:
Effective depth 𝑑 = s + 2 × Cyy and d >2b,
[b is width of member in the plane of batten]
Overall depth (D) = d+2e, e being edge distance
Length of batten = 𝑆 + 2𝑏
Thickness of batten = a/50 where a is the distance between inner
bolt/rivet/weld
Step 6: -
Size of intermediate battens:
3
Effective depth 𝑑 = (s + 2 × Cyy ) and d >2b,
4

[b is width of member in the plane of batten]

Overall depth (D) = d+2e, e being edge distance
Length of batten = 𝑆 + 2𝑏
Thickness of batten = a/50 where a is the distance between inner
bolt/rivet/weld

Step 7: -
Design the end connections for batten system to resist
calculated 𝑉𝑙 and M.
DESIGN OF BATTEN
PLATES USING BOLT
CONNECTION
Example: A batten column of 10-m long is carrying a factored
load of 1150 kN. The column is restrained in position but not in
direction at both ends. Design a built up column using channel
sections placed back to back.
Design batten plates using bolt connection.
Solution:
Design of column:
𝑃 = 1150 kN = 1150 × 103 N
L = 1.0 × 10 × 103 = 10000 mm
Let design axial compressive stress for the column be 125 MPa
1150×103
Required area = = 9200 mm2
125

Let us try two ISMC 350 @ 413 N/m

Relevant properties of ISMC 350 [ Table II SP 6 (1): 1964]
𝐴 = 5366 mm2, 𝑟𝑧𝑧 = 136.6 mm,
𝑟𝑦𝑦 = 28.3 mm 𝑡𝑓 = 13.5 mm
𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 10008 × 104 mm4 𝐼𝑦𝑦 = 430.6 × 104 mm4
𝑐𝑦𝑦 = 24.4 mm 𝑏 = 100 mm
Area provided = 2 × 5366 = 10732 mm2
𝐿 10000
= = 73.21
𝑟𝑧𝑧 136.6
𝐾𝐿
The effective slenderness ratio, = 1.1 × 73.21
𝑟 𝑒
= 80.53 < 180; ok

𝐾𝐿
For = 80.53, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa and buckling class c, the
𝑟 𝑒
design compressive stress from Table 9c of IS 800 :2007
136−121
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 136 − × 0.53 = 135.2 MPa
10

Therefore load carrying capacity = 𝐴𝑒 𝑓𝑐𝑑

= 10732 × 135.2 × 10−3
= 1451 kN > 1200 kN, OK
Spacing of channels:
𝑆 2
2𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 2 𝐼𝑦𝑦 + 𝐴 + 𝐶𝑦𝑦
2
𝑆 2
or 2 × 10008 × 104 = 2 × 430.6 × 104 + 5366 + 24.4
2
⇒ 𝑆 = 218.4 mm
Let us keep the channels at a spacing of 220 mm
Spacing of battens:
As per clause 7.7.3 of IS 800: 2007,
𝐶
< 0.7𝜆
𝑟𝑦𝑦

𝑜𝑟 𝐶 < 0.7 × 𝜆 × 𝑟𝑦𝑦 = 0.7 × 80.53 × 28.3 = 1595.3 mm

𝐶
Also < 50 or 𝐶 < 50 × 28.3 = 1415 mm
𝑟𝑦𝑦

Hence, provide battens at a spacing of 1400 mm.

Size of end battens (cl. 7.7.2.3 of IS 800 :2007):
Provide 20 mm bolts.
Edge distance = 1.5 × ℎ𝑜𝑙𝑒 𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 [Cl. 10.2.4.2 IS 800:2007]
= 1.5 × 20 + 2 = 33 mm
Effective depth = 𝑠 + 𝐶𝑦𝑦
= 220 + 2 × 24.4 = 268.8 mm > 2 × 100 mm
Hence, chosen effective depth is safe.
Overall depth = 268.8 + 2 × 33 = 334.8 mm
1
Required thickness of batten = × 220 + 2 × 50 = 6.4 mm
50

Length of batten = 220 + 2 × 100 = 420 mm

Provide 420×340×8 mm end batten plates.
Size of intermediate battens (cl. 7.7.2.3 of IS 800 :2007):
3
Effective depth = × (220 + 2 × 𝐶𝑦𝑦 )
4
3
= × (220 + 2 × 24.4) = 201.6 mm
4

> 2 × 100 = 200 mm

Hence adopt an effective depth of 210 mm
Overall depth = 210 + 2 × 33 = 276 mm
Therefore, provide a 420×300×8 mm batten plates @1400 mm
c/c.
Design forces:
2.5 2.5
Transverse shear, 𝑉= ×𝑃 = × 1150 × 103
100 100
= 28750 N
𝑉𝐶
Longitudinal shear 𝑉𝑙 =
𝑁𝑆
Spacing of battens, C = 1400 mm
N = No of parallel planes of battens = 2
S = minimum transverse distance between the centroid of the
bolt/weld group = 220 + 2 × 50 = 320 mm
28750×1400
∴ 𝑉𝑙 = = 62891 N
2×320

𝑉𝐶 28750×1400
Moment, 𝑀 = = = 10.06 × 106 N-mm
2𝑁 2×2
Check
i) For end battens
62891 250
Shear stress = = 23.12 MPa < = 131.22 MPa
340×8 3×1.1
6𝑀 6×10.06×106
Bending stress = =
𝑡𝑑 2 8×3402
250
= 65.27 MPa < = 227.27 MPa
1.1
Hence safe.

b) For intermediate battens

62891
Shear stress = = 26.2 MPa < 131.22 MPa
300×8
6×10.06×106
Bending stress = = 83.83 MPa < 227.27 MPa
8×3002
Hence safe.
 Connection:
The connection should be designed to transmit both shear and
bending moment.
Assuming 20 mm diameter bolts.
Strength of bolt in single shear
𝜋×202
𝐴𝑛𝑏 ×𝑓𝑢𝑏 0.78× ×400
4
= = × 10−3 = 45.27 kN
3×𝛾𝑚𝑏 3×1.25

Minimum pitch, p = 2.5d=2.5×20=50 mm

Minimum end distance, e = 1.5 d0 =1.5×22=33 mm

Provide p = 60 mm and e = 35 mm
kb is smaller of 35/(3×22), 60/(3×22)-0.25, 400/410, 1

Kb = 0.53
Strength of bolt in bearing = 2.5𝑘𝑏 𝑑𝑡𝑓𝑢 /𝛾𝑚𝑏
410
= 2.5 × 0.53 × 20 × 8 × × 10−3 = 69.5 kN
1.25
Hence, strength of bolt = 45.27 kN
62891
Number of bolts required = = 1.39
45.27×103
Let us provide four bolts to take account the stresses due to
bending moments as well.
Check for combined action: For end battens
62891
Force in each bolt due to shear = = 15723 N
4
Pitch provided = (D-2e)/3= (340-2×35)/3 = 90 mm.
𝑟 2 = 2[(90/2)2+(90+90/2)2) = 2[452+1352] = 40500 mm2
 𝑀𝑟 10.06×106 ×135
Force due to moment = = = 33533 N
𝑟2 40500

Resultant force = 157232 + 335332

= 37036 N = 37 kN < 45.26 kN
Hence safe.
Check for combined action: For intermediate battens
62891
Force in each bolt due to shear = = 15723 N
4
Pitch provided = (D-2e)/3= (300-2×35)/3 = 77 mm.
𝑟 2 = 2[(77/2)2+(77+77/2)2) = 2[38.52+115.52] = 29645 mm2

𝑀𝑟 10.06×106 ×115.5
Force due to moment = = = 39195 N
𝑟2 29645

Resultant force = 157232 + 391952

= 42231N = 42.23 kN < 45.26 kN
Hence safe.
Channels back-to-back connected by bolts:

20 mm bolt

Intermediate batten
1400 mm
420 mm×300 mm×8 mm

ISMC 350

End batten
420 mm×340 mm×8 mm
220 mm

220 mm 350 mm
 DESIGN OF BATTEN
PLATES USING WELD
CONNECTION
Example: A batten column of 10-m long is carrying a factored
load of 1150 kN. The column is restrained in position but not in
direction at both ends. Design a built up column using channel
sections placed back to back.
Design batten plates using weld connection.
Solution:
Design of column:
𝑃 = 1150 kN = 1150 × 103 N
L = 1.0 × 10 × 103 = 10000 mm
Let design axial compressive stress for the column be 125 MPa
1150×103
Required area = = 9200 mm2
125

Let us try two ISMC 350 @ 413 N/m

Relevant properties of ISMC 350 [ Table II SP 6 (1): 1964]
𝐴 = 5366 mm2, 𝑟𝑧𝑧 = 136.6 mm,
𝑟𝑦𝑦 = 28.3 mm 𝑡𝑓 = 13.5 mm
𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 10008 × 104 mm4 𝐼𝑦𝑦 = 430.6 × 104 mm4
𝑐𝑦𝑦 = 24.4 mm 𝑏 = 100 mm
Area provided = 2 × 5366 = 10732 mm2
𝐿 10000
= = 73.21
𝑟𝑧𝑧 136.6
𝐾𝐿
The effective slenderness ratio, = 1.1 × 73.21
𝑟 𝑒
= 80.53 < 180; ok

𝐾𝐿
For = 80.53, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa and buckling class c, the
𝑟 𝑒
design compressive stress from Table 9c of IS 800 :2007
136;121
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 136 − × 0.53 = 135.2 MPa
10

Therefore load carrying capacity = 𝐴𝑒 𝑓𝑐𝑑

= 10732 × 135.2 × 10;3
= 1451 kN > 1200 kN, OK
Spacing of channels:
𝑆 2
2𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 2 𝐼𝑦𝑦 + 𝐴 + 𝐶𝑦𝑦
2
𝑆 2
or 2 × 10008 × 104 = 2 × 430.6 × 104 + 5366 + 24.4
2
⇒ 𝑆 = 218.4 mm
Let us keep the channels at a spacing of 220 mm
Spacing of battens:
As per clause 7.7.3 of IS 800: 2007,
𝐶
< 0.7𝜆
𝑟𝑦𝑦

𝑜𝑟 𝐶 < 0.7 × 𝜆 × 𝑟𝑦𝑦 = 0.7 × 80.53 × 28.3 = 1595.3 mm

𝐶
Also < 50 or 𝐶 < 50 × 28.3 = 1415 mm
𝑟𝑦𝑦

Hence, provide battens at a spacing of 1400 mm.

Size of end battens (cl. 7.7.2.3 of IS 800 :2007):
Overall depth of batten = 220 + 2 × 𝐶𝑦𝑦
= 220 + 2 × 24.4 = 268.8 ≈ 270 mm
1
Required thickness of batten = × 220 = 4.4 mm
50

Adopt battens with the thickness of 6-mm

Let provide a 70 mm overlap of battens on channel flange for
welding.
[Overlap > 4 t = 4 × 6 = 24 mm] OK
Length of batten = 220 + 2 × 70 = 360 mm
Provide 360×270×6 mm end batten plates.
Size of intermediate battens (cl. 7.7.2.3 of IS 800 :2007):
3
Overall depth = × (220 + 2 × 𝐶𝑦𝑦 )
4
3
= × (220 + 2 × 24.4) = 201.6 mm
4

> 2 × 100 = 200 mm

Hence adopt overall depth of 220 mm
Therefore, provide a 360×220×6 mm batten plates.
Design forces:
2.5 2.5
Transverse shear, 𝑉= ×𝑃 = × 1150 × 103
100 100
= 28750 N
𝑉𝐶
Longitudinal shear 𝑉𝑙 =
𝑁𝑆
Spacing of battens, C = 1400 mm
N = No of parallel planes of battens = 2
S = minimum transverse distance between the centroid of the
bolt/weld group = 220 + 2 × 50 = 320 mm
28750×1400
∴ 𝑉𝑙 = = 62891 N
2×320

𝑉𝐶 28750×1400
Moment, 𝑀 = = = 10.06 × 106 N-mm
2𝑁 2×2
Check
i) For end battens.
62891 250
Shear stress = = 38.82 MPa < = 131.22 MPa
270×6 3×1.1
6𝑀 6×10.06×106
Bending stress = =
𝑡𝑑 2 6×2702
250
= 138 MPa < = 227.27 MPa
1.1
Hence safe.

b) For intermediate battens.

62891
Shear stress = = 47.64 MPa < 131.22 MPa
220×6
6×10.06×106
Bending stress = = 207.85 MPa < 227.27 MPa
6×2202
Hence safe.
Design of weld:
Welding is done on all the four sides as shown in the figure.
Let 𝑡 = throat thickness of weld.
2
70 × 𝑡 3 220 2 × 𝑡 × 2203
𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 2 × + 70 × 𝑡 × +
12 2 12
70×𝑡 3
Neglecting the term 2 × being insignificant.
12
Therefore, 𝐼𝑧𝑧 = 346.87 × 104 𝑡 mm4
2
𝑡 × 703 220 × 𝑡 3 70
𝐼𝑦𝑦 = 2 × +2× + 2 × 220 × 𝑡 ×
12 12 2
220×𝑡 3
Neglecting the term 2 × being insignificant.
12
Therefore, 𝐼𝑦𝑦 = 59.62 × 104 𝑡 mm4
 𝐼𝑝 = 𝐼𝑧𝑧 + 𝐼𝑦𝑦 = 346.87 × 104 𝑡 + 59.62 × 104 𝑡
= 406.49 × 104 𝑡 mm4
220 2 70 2
𝑟= + = 115.43 mm
2 2
35
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 = = 0.30
115.43

Direct shear stress (cl. 10.5.9 of IS 800:2007)

62891 108.43
= = N/mm2
2×70:2×220 𝑡 𝑡

10.06×106 ×115.43
Shear stress due to bending moment =
406.49×104 𝑡
285.67
= N/mm2
𝑡
Combined stress due to shear and bending
2 2
108.43 285.67 108.43 285.67
= + +2× × × 0.3
𝑡 𝑡 𝑡 𝑡
334.59 410
= < = 189.4
𝑡 3 × 1.25
or 𝑡 = 1.77 mm
Size of weld = 1.77/0.7 = 2.5 mm
The size of weld should not be less than 5 mm for 13.5 mm
flange.
Hence provide a 5 mm weld to make the connection.
Channels back-to-back connected by welding:

5 mm weld

Intermediate batten

1400 mm
360 mm×220 mm×6 mm

ISMC 350

End batten
360 mm×270 mm×6 mm
220 mm

220 mm 350 mm
Design of Column Splices
 Splices

• A joint when provided in the length of a member is called

splices.
• If a compression member is loaded concentrically,
theoretically no splice is required.
• However, the load is never truly axial and the real column has
to resist bending due to this eccentrically applied load.

Column sections can be spliced in the following cases:

1. When the length of the column is more than the length of
the column section available.
2. In case of multistorey buildings, the section of the column
required for the various storey may be different, as the
load goes on increasing for columns of the lower storeys.
 Specifications for the design of splices

• Where the ends of the compression members are faced

for complete bearing over the whole area, these should be
spliced to hold the connected members accurately in
position, and to resist any tension when bending is
present.
• Where such members are not faced for complete bearing,
splices should be design to transmit all the forces to
which these are subjected.
• Splices are designed as short columns.
Various type of splices used in compression member
 Steps for the design of splice

1. For axial compressive load the splice plates are provided

on the flanges of the two column sections to be spliced.

If the column has machined ends, the splice is designed only

to keep the columns in position and to carry tension due to the
bending moment to which it may be subjected. The splice
plate and the connection should be design to carry 50% of the
axial load and tension.

If the ends are not machined, the splice and connections are
design to resist the total axial load and any tension, if present
due to the bending moment.
 Steps for the design of splice

• The load for the design of splice and connection due to axial
load,
𝑃𝑢
𝑃𝑢1 = (for machined ends)
4
𝑃𝑢
𝑃𝑢1 = (for non machined ends)
2
Where, 𝑃𝑢 is the axial factored load.

• The load for the design of splice and connection due

bending moment,
𝑀𝑢
𝑃𝑢2 =
𝑙𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑟𝑚

Where, lever arm is the c/c distance of the two splice plates and
𝑀𝑢 is the factored bending moment.
 Steps for the design of splice
2. Splice plates are assumed to act as short columns (with zero
slenderness ratio). So these plates will be subjected to yield
stress (𝑓𝑦 ).

3. The cross-sectional area of the splice plate is calculated by

dividing the appropriate portion of the factored load coming
over the splice by the yield stress.
𝑃𝑢1 +𝑃𝑢2
c/s area required =
𝑓𝑦
4. The width of splice plate is usually kept equal to the width of
the column flange.
Width of splice = 𝑏𝑓 (width of flange)
The thickness of the splice plate can be found by dividing the
c/s area of the plates with its width.
 Steps for the design of splice

5. Nominal diameter of bolts for connection is assumed and the

strength of the bolt is computed.

6. In case of bearing plate is to be designed between two

column sections, the length and width of the plate are kept
equal to the size of lower-storey column and the thickness is
computed by equating the ultimate moment due to the factored
load to the moment of resistance of plate section.
Example: A column ISHB 300 @ 576.8 N/m is to support a
factored axial load of 500 kN, shear force of 120 kN and
bending moment of 40 kNm. Design the splice plate and
connection using 4.6 grade bolts. Use steel of grade Fe 410.
Solution:
For steel of grade Fe 410: 𝑓𝑢 = 410 MPa, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 Mpa
For bolts of grade 4.6: 𝑓𝑢𝑏 = 400 MPa
Partial safety factors for material:(Table 5 IS 800:2007)
𝛾𝑚0 = 1.10 𝛾𝑚𝑏 = 1.25
The relevant properties of ISHB 300 @ 576.8 N/m are (Table I,
SP 6-1)
𝐴 = 7485 mm2 𝑏𝑓 = 250 mm,
𝑡𝑓 = 10.6 mm 𝑡𝑤 = 7.6 mm
Assume the ends of the column sections to be machined for
complete bearing. As the column ends are flush, it is assumed that
50% of the load is transferred directly and 50% is transferred
through the splice and fastenings. Therefore,
500
The direct load on each splice plate = 50% 𝑜𝑓 = 125 kN
2

𝑀𝑢 40×103
Load on splice due to moment = = = 130.72 kN
𝑙𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑟𝑚 300+6

(Assuming 6 mm thick splice plate, the lever arm = 300 + 6 mm)

Total design load for splice, 𝑃𝑠 = 125 + 130.72 = 255.72 kN

𝑃𝑠 255.72×103
Sectional area of splice plate required = =
𝑓𝑦 250

= 1022.9 mm2
Width of the splice plate should be kept equal to the width of
the flange.
Here, the width of the splice plate = 250 mm
1022.9
Hence, thickness of splice plate = = 4.09 mm ≮ 6 mm
250
Provide a 250×6 mm splice plate.

The length of the splice plate depends upon the number of

bolts in vertical row.
Let us provide 20 mm diameter bolts of grade 4.6.
Strength of 20 mm diameter bolt in single shear (cl. 10.3.3, IS
800:2007)
𝑓𝑢𝑏 400
𝐴𝑛𝑏 245×
= 3
= 3
× 10−3 = 45.26 kN
𝛾𝑚𝑏 1.25
Strength of bolt in bearing = 2.5𝑘𝑏 𝑑𝑡𝑓𝑢 /𝛾𝑚𝑏 (cl. 10.3.4, IS
800:2007)

For 20 mm diameter bolts the minimum edge distance,

𝑒 = 1.5 × 𝑑0 = 1.5 × 20 + 2 = 33 mm
The minimum pitch, p = 2.5 × 20 = 50 mm
Let us provide an edge distance (e) of 35 mm and pitch (p) of
60 mm.

𝑘𝑏 is smaller of
𝑒 35 𝑝 60
= = 0.53 , − 0.25 = − 0.25 = 0.66 ,
3𝑑0 3×22 3𝑑0 3×22
𝑓𝑢𝑏 400
= = 0.98 and 1.0
𝑓𝑢 410

Hence 𝑘𝑏 = 0.53
 410
∴ Strength in bearing = 2.5 × 0.53 × 20 × 6 × × 10−3
1.25
= 52.15 kN
Hence, the strength of bolt (Bv) = 45.26 kN
𝑃𝑠 255.72
Number of bolts required, n = = = 5.65 ≈ 6
𝐵𝑣 45.26

Provide 6 bolts for each splice.

Length of the splice plate = 2 × (2 × 60 + 2 × 35) = 380 mm
Provide a splice plate 380×250×6 mm on column flanges as
shown in the figure.
 Design of Column
Splices due to Shear
Example: A column ISHB 300 @ 576.8 N/m is to support a
factored axial load of 500 kN, shear force of 120 kN and
bending moment of 40 kNm. Design the splice plate and
connection using 4.6 grade bolts. Use steel of grade Fe 410.
Solution:
For steel of grade Fe 410: 𝑓𝑢 = 410 MPa, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 Mpa
For bolts of grade 4.6: 𝑓𝑢𝑏 = 400MPa
Partial safety factors for material:(Table 5 IS 800:2007)
𝛾𝑚0 = 1.10𝛾𝑚𝑏 = 1.25
The relevant properties of ISHB 300 @ 576.8 N/m are (Table I,
SP 6-1)
𝐴 = 7485 mm2𝑏𝑓 = 250 mm,
𝑡𝑓 = 10.6mm 𝑡𝑤 = 7.6 mm
Assume the ends of the column sections to be machined for
complete bearing. As the column ends are flush, it is assumed that
50% of the load is transferred directly and 50% is transferred
through the splice and fastenings. Therefore,
500
The direct load on each splice plate = 50% 𝑜𝑓 = 125 kN
2

𝑀𝑢 40×103
Load on splice due to moment = = = 130.72 kN
𝑙𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑟𝑚 300+6

(Assuming 6 mm thick splice plate, the lever arm = 300 + 6 mm)

Total design load for splice, 𝑃𝑠 = 125 + 130.72 = 255.72 kN

𝑃𝑠 255.72×103
Sectional area of splice plate required = =
𝑓𝑦 250

= 1022.9mm2
Width of the splice plate should be kept equal to the width of
the flange.
Here, the width of the splice plate = 250 mm
1022.9
Hence, thickness of splice plate = = 4.09 mm ≮ 6 mm
250
Provide a 250×6 mm splice plate.

The length of the splice plate depends upon the number of

bolts in vertical row.
Let us provide 20 mm diameter bolts of grade 4.6.
Strength of 20 mm diameter bolt in single shear (cl. 10.3.3, IS
800:2007)
𝑓𝑢𝑏 400
𝐴𝑛𝑏 245 ×
3 3
= = × 10−3 = 45.26 kN
𝛾𝑚𝑏 1.25
Strength of bolt in bearing = 2.5𝑘𝑏 𝑑𝑡𝑓𝑢 /𝛾𝑚𝑏 (cl. 10.3.4, IS
800:2007)

For 20 mm diameter bolts the minimum edge distance,

𝑒 = 1.5 × 𝑑0 = 1.5 × 20 + 2 = 33 mm
The minimum pitch, p = 2.5 × 20 = 50 mm
Let us provide an edge distance (e) of 35 mm and pitch (p) of
60 mm.

𝑘𝑏 is smaller of
𝑒 35 𝑝 60
= = 0.53 , − 0.25 = − 0.25 = 0.66 ,
3𝑑0 3×22 3𝑑0 3×22
𝑓𝑢𝑏 400
= = 0.98 and 1.0
𝑓𝑢 410

Hence 𝑘𝑏 = 0.53
 410
∴ Strength in bearing = 2.5 × 0.53 × 20 × 6 × × 10−3
1.25
= 52.15kN
Hence, the strength of bolt (Bv) = 45.26 kN
𝑃𝑠 255.72
Number of bolts required, n = = = 5.65 ≈ 6
𝐵𝑣 45.26

Provide 6 bolts for each splice.

Length of the splice plate = 2 × (2 × 60 + 2 × 35) = 380 mm
Provide a splice plate 380×250×6 mm on column flanges as
shown in the figure.
Splice plates for shear:
The splice plate for the shear force is provided on the web. A pair
of splice plate (one on each side of web) are provided.
Let us provide 20 mm diameter bolts of grade 4.6.
Strength of bolt in double shear = 45.26 × 2 = 90.52 kN
Strength in bearing = 2.5𝑘𝑏 𝑑𝑡𝑓𝑢 /𝛾𝑚𝑏
Where, 𝑘𝑏 = 0.53 (taking 𝑒 = 35 mm and p = 60 mm),
𝑡 = 7.6 mm (web thickness)
410
∴ Strength in bearing = 2.5 × 0.53 × 20 × 7.6 × × 10−3 =
1.25

66.06 kN
Hence, strength of 20 mm bolt = 66.06kN
Shear force in the web, 𝑉 = 120 kN
120
Number of bolts required = = 1.8 ≈ 2
66.06

Provide 2, 20 mm diameter bolts on each side of the splice.

Length of the splice plate = 4 × 35 = 140 mm
Width of the splice plate = 60 + 2 × 35 = 130 mm
Design shear strength of splice plate (cl. 8.4, IS 800:2007),

𝑓𝑦
𝑉𝑑 = ×ℎ×𝑡
3 × 𝛾𝑚0
250
= × 130 × 2𝑡𝑠 × 10−3
3 × 1.1
= 34.12 𝑡𝑠 kN
Now, 𝑉𝑑 > 𝑉
or 34.12 𝑡𝑠 > 120
Thickness of the splice plate required,
120
𝑡𝑠 = = 3.52 mm ≮ 6mm
34.12
So provide a pair of 140×130×6 mm shear splice plates on each
side of the web as shown in the figure.
35
35 60 35
60
60 20 mm
35 140
35 bolts
60
60
35

ISHB
300
Front view Side view
INTRODUCTION TO FLEXURAL
MEMBERS: BEAMS
 INTRODUCTION
• Flexural members or bending members are commonly called
BEAMS.

• A beam is a structural member subjected to transverse loads

i.e., loads perpendicular to the longitudinal axis.

• The load produce Bending moment & Shear forces.

http://wasatchsteel.blogspot.in/

http://www.steel-bridges.com/
 DIFFERENT TYPES OF BEAMS
• JOIST: A closely spaced beams supporting floors or roofs of
building but not supporting the other beams.

• GIRDER: A large beam, used for supporting a number of

joists.

• PURLIN: Purlins are used to carry roof loads in trusses.

• STRINGER: In building, beams supporting stair steps; in

bridges a longitudinal beam supporting deck floor & supported
by floor beam.

• FLOOR BEAM: A major beam supporting other beams in a

building; also the transverse beam in bridge floors.
 DIFFERENT TYPES OF BEAMS
• SPANDREL BEAM: In a building, a beam on the outside
perimeter of a floor, supporting the exterior walls and outside
edge of the floor

• GIRT: A horizontal beam spanning the wall columns of

industrial buildings used to support wall coverings is called a
GIRT.

• RAFTER: A roof beam usually supported by purlins.

• LINTELS: This type of beams are used to support the loads

from the masonry over the openings .
 NATURE OF FORCES ACTING ON BEAMS
• It is assumed that the beam is subjected to only transverse
loading.

• All the loads and sections lie in the plane of symmetry.

• It follows that such a beam will be primarily subjected to

bending accompanied by shear in the loading plane with no
external torsion and axial force.
 NATURE OF FORCES ACTING ON BEAMS

• The problem of torsion can not completely be avoided in a

beam even if the beam shape is symmetrical and loads are in
the plane of symmetry.

• The reason is the instability caused by compressive stresses.

Such instability is defined as LATERAL BUCKLING .
When it is involving only local components of a beam it is
called LOCAL BUCKLING.

• Local buckling is a function of width-thickness ratio.

 MODES OF FAILURE
Primary modes of failure of beams are as follows:
1. Bending failure
2. Shear failure
3. Deflection failure

1. Bending failure: Bending failure generally occurs due to

crushing of compression flange or fracture of tension flange of
the beam.
2. Shear failure: This occurs due to buckling of web of the beam
near location of high shear forces. The beam can fail locally
due to crushing or buckling of the web near the reaction of
concentrated loads.
3. Deflection failure: A beam designed to have adequate strength
may become unsuitable if it is not able to support its load
without excessive deflections.
TYPES OF STEEL SECTIONS
CASTELLATED BEAMS
 CONSIDERATIONS IN DESIGN OF BEAMS

• Beams should be proportioned for strength in bending

keeping in view of the lateral and local stability of the
compression flange.

• The selected shape should have capacity to withstand

essential strength in shear and local bearing .

• The beam dimension should be suitably proportioned for

stiffness, keeping in mind their deflections and deformations
under service conditions .
 LIMITATIONS OF ANGLES , T-SECTIONS AND
CHANNELS

• Angles and T-sections are weak in bending.

• Channels only be used for light loads.

• The rolled steel channels and angle sections are used in those
cases where they can be designed and executed satisfactory.

• This is because the load is not likely to be in the plane, which

removes torsional eccentricities .

• Also, it is complicated to calculate the lateral buckling

characteristics of these sections .
 FAILURE MODES OF
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
 MAIN FAILURE MODES OF HOT-
ROLLED BEAMS
Category –I:
Excessive bending triggering collapse
Category –II:
Lateral torsional buckling of long beams
Category –III:
Failure by local buckling of
(i) flange in compression
(ii) Web due to shear
(iii) Web under compression
Category –IV:
Local failure by
(i) shear yield of web
(ii) Local crushing of web
(iii) Buckling of thin flanges
 SELECTION OF SUITABLE SECTION

I-sections is the most efficient and economical and therefore,

most commonly used section as a beam member.
𝑴
σ= 𝒚
𝑰
𝟏
𝑰= 𝒃𝒅𝟑
𝟏𝟐
CONVENTIONAL USES OF VARIOUS SECTIONS

• Rolled steel channels and angle sections are generally used as

PURLINS.
• For higher loads I-sections are preferred .
• Double angles , T-sections or ISJB sections are used as
LINTELS.
• For beams with large spans and light loads , CASTELLATED
BEAMS are chosen.
CRITERION OF SELECTING A BEAM SECTION

• The usual method of selecting a beam section is by using a

section modulus .

• The criterion of economy is weight rather than the section

modulus .

• Sometimes deflection and occasionally shear may be the

necessary criterion for selection of section.

• It is desirable to choose a light beam furnishing the

required modulus of section .
 DESIGN CRITERIA

1. Based on deflection
2. Based on stress due to bending
3. Based on Shear

DEFLECTION CRITERIA

The amount of maximum deflection

depends on:
1. Span
2. Moment of inertia of the section
3. Distribution of load
4. Modulus of elasticity &
5. Support condition
In general the maximum deflection in beam is given by

𝑾𝑳𝟑
𝜹= 𝑲
𝑬𝑰

Where,
W Total load on the span
L Effective span length
E Modulus of elasticity
I Moment of inertia of the section
K a coefficient depends upon the distribution of
loading & end support of the beam
Beam Loading Coefficient of
maximum
deflection

Total load W

5
384
L
Beam Loading Coefficient of
maximum
deflection

Total load W

1
8

L
 Beam Loading Coefficient of
maximum
deflection

W
1
48

L/2 L/2
Beam Loading Coefficient of
maximum
deflection

W
1
3
L
 Beam Loading Coefficient of
maximum
deflection

W W
23
384
L/3 L/3 L/3
Beam Loading Coefficient of
maximum
deflection

Total load W

1
384

L
 Beam Loading Coefficient of
maximum
deflection

W W W
19
384

L/4 L/4 L/4 L/4

Beam Loading Coefficient of
maximum
deflection

Total load W

7
1920

L/2 L/2
 Beam Loading Coefficient of
maximum
deflection

Total load W

1
192

L/2 L/2
Beam Loading Coefficient of
maximum deflection

W 3
𝑎 𝑎2 2
1−
9 3𝐿 𝐿2
 LIMITING DEFLECTION

The deflection of a member shall not be such that as to

impair the strength or efficiency of the structure & lead to
damage to finishing. Generally, the maximum deflection
should not exceed the limit recommended by IS 800-2007
in Table 6.

EFFECTIVE LENGTH FOR LATERAL

TORSIONAL BUCKLING
Effective length LLT for lateral torsional buckling shall be
calculated as given in Table 15
 EFFECTIVE LENGTH FOR
BEAMS BETWEEN SUPPORTS
(Table 15, Clause 8.3.1, IS 800: 2007)
Support Conditions Effective Length KL
Compression flange at the ends L
unrestrained against lateral bending
(free to rotate in plan)
Compression flange partially 0.85L
restrained against lateral bending
(partially free to rotate in plane at the
bearings)
Compression flange fully restrained 0.7L
against lateral bending
(rotation fully restrained in plan)
 DESIGN PROCEDURE

The design procedure can be divided into three parts and they are :-

• Structural :Bending moment, shear force, deflection and stability.

• Secondary effects : Local buckling, and secondary forces and

connections.

• Practical limitations : Durability , fabrication tolerances , erection.

LATERALLY SUPPORTED BEAMS
 Laterally Supported Beam (Cl. 8.2.1, IS 800: 2007)

Design Bending Strength

 If V < 0.6 Vd

Where,
V is the factored design shear force and Vd is the design shear
strength of the cross-section
The design bending strength, Md shall be taken as:

Md = βbZpfy / ϒm0
To avoid irreversible deformation under serviceability loads,
following conditions are to be satisfied.
Md ≤ 1.2Zefy/ϒm0 for simply supported beams
Md ≤ 1.5Zefy/ϒm0 for cantilever beams;
Where,
βb = 1.0 for plastic and compact sections;
βb = Ze / Zp for semi-compact sections;
Zp , Ze = plastic and elastic section moduli of the
cross-section, respectively;
fy = yield stress of the material; and
ϒm0 = partial safety factor
 If V > 0.6 Vd
The design bending strength Md will be taken as,
Md = Mdv
Where, Mdv is the design bending strength under high shear and it is
calculated as,
(a) Plastic or compact section
𝑍𝑒 𝑓𝑦
𝑀𝑑𝑣 = 𝑀𝑑 − 𝛽 𝑀𝑑 − 𝑀𝑓𝑑 ≤ 1.2
𝛾𝑚0
Where,
2
𝑉
𝛽 = 2 −1
𝑉𝑑
Vd = design shear strength as governed by web yielding or web
buckling = 𝐴𝑣 𝑓𝑣
fv = design shear strength
Av = shear area = Dtw for rolled sections
= dtw for welded/built up sections
V = factored shear force
Md = plastic design moment of the whole section disregarding high
shear force effect and considering web buckling effects.

Mfd = plastic design strength of the area of the cross section excluding
the shear area
𝑑 2 𝑡𝑤
𝑀𝑓𝑑 = 𝑓𝑦 for built up sections
4
𝐷 2 𝑡𝑤
𝑀𝑓𝑑 = 𝑓𝑦for rolled sections
4
𝑑 = 𝐷 − 2𝑡𝑓
(b) Semi-compact section
𝑓𝑦
𝑀𝑑𝑣 = 𝑍𝑒
𝛾𝑚0
Design for Shear (Cl. 8.4, IS 800: 2007)

The factored design shear force V in a beam should satisfy,

𝑉𝑛
𝑉≤
𝛾𝑚0

Where Vn = nominal shear strength of a section

𝐴𝑣 𝑓𝑦𝑤
𝑉𝑛 =
3

Where Av = shear area

fyw = yield strength of the web
Shear Areas of different Sections (Cl. 8.4.1.1, IS 800: 2007):

Section Shear Area Av

Hot rolled (major axis Dtw
bending)
Welded (major axis bending) dtw
Hot rolled or Welded 2btf
(minor axis bending)
Rectangular hollow Sections AD/(b+D)
(loaded parallel to height)
Rectangular hollow Sections Ab/(b+D)
(loaded parallel to width)
Circular hollow tubes 2A/π
Plates & solid bars A
 Web Buckling
• The web behaves like a column if placed under concentrated
load.

• The Web is quite thin and therefore is subjected to buckling.

• Web buckling occurs when the intensity of vertical compressive

stress near the center of section becomes greater than the critical
buckling stress for the web acting as column.
 Web Buckling
For all cases, bottom flange is assumed to be restrained against
lateral deflection and rotation. For the top flanges, the end
restraints and the effective depth of the web to be considered are
as follows:

1. Restrained against lateral deflection and rotation, the effective

depth = d1/2

2. Restrained against lateral deflection but not against rotation, the

effective depth= (2/3) d1
3. Retrained against rotation but not against lateral deflection,
effective depth = d1

4. Not restrained against rotation and lateral deflection, the

effective depth = 2d1
Web buckling strength

𝐹𝑤𝑏 = 𝐵𝑡𝑤 𝑓𝑐𝑑

(below concentrated load)

𝐹𝑤𝑏 = 𝐵1 𝑡𝑤 𝑓𝑐𝑑
(at support)

Where,
Fwb = web buckling strength at the support
B = b+ 2n1 , B1= b+n1
n1 = length from dispersion at 45° to the level of neutral axis
tw = thickness of the web
fcd = allowable compressive stress corresponding to assumed web strut
according to buckling curve c.
Here, the effective length of strut will be le = 0.7d
𝑙𝑒 0.7𝑑
Thus, the slenderness ratio λ = =
𝑟𝑦 𝑟𝑦
𝐼𝑦 𝑏𝑡 3 𝑡
The radius of gyration, 𝑟𝑦 = = =
𝐴 12×𝑏×𝑡 12

0.7𝑑 0.7𝑑× 12 2.5𝑑

Hence, λ = = ≈
𝑟𝑦 𝑡 𝑡
Thus, the slenderness ratio of the idealized web-strut is taken as
2.5𝑑
λ=
𝑡
Bearing length
An empirical dispersion is assumed through the flange to the
flange-to-web connection at a slope of 1:2.5
Web Crippling:
𝑏1 𝑡𝑤 𝑓𝑦𝑤
𝐹𝑤𝑐 =
𝛾𝑚0
Where
Fwc = web crippling strength
b1 = bearing length
= b+2n1 under concentrated load
= b+n1 under reactions at support
Minimum bearing length = 100 mm
n1 = dispersion through the flange to the
flange-to-web connection at a slope of 1:2.5
to the plane of the flange i.e. 𝑛1 = 2.5 𝑡𝑓 + 𝑅1

tw = thickness of the web

fyw = design yield strength of the web
DESIGN OF LATERALLY
SUPPORTED BEAMS
 DESIGN STEPS FOR
LATERALLY SUPPORTED BEAMS
1) The loads acting on the beam are calculated by multiplying the
appropriate partial load factors.

2) The distribution of B.M. & S.F. along the length of the beam is
determined. The maximum B.M. & S.F. is calculated

3) A trial plastic section for the beam is worked out from the
following equation:
𝑀𝑑
𝑍𝑝 =
𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0
4) A suitable section is selected which has plastic section modulus
greater than the calculated value. ISMB, ISLB, ISWB sections are
in general preferred.
5) The section is classified as plastic, compact or semi compact
depending upon the specified limits of b/tf and d/tw as specified
in Table 2, IS 800: 2007.

6) Calculate the design shear strength (Vd) from the relation:

𝑓𝑦
𝑉𝑑 = ℎ𝑡𝑤
3𝛾𝑚0

7) The beam is checked for high/low shear. If V < 0.6 Vd , the beam
will be low shear and if V > 0.6 Vd , the beam will be high shear.

8) The trial section is checked for design bending strength

For low shear:
Md = βbZpfy / ϒm0
≤ 1.2Zefy/ϒm0 (for simply supported beams)
≤ 1.5Zefy/ϒm0 (for cantilever beams)
For high shear:
𝑍𝑒 𝑓𝑦
𝑀𝑑𝑣 = 𝑀𝑑 − 𝛽 𝑀𝑑 − 𝑀𝑓𝑑 ≤ 1.2
𝛾𝑚0
(for plastic and compact section)
𝑓𝑦
𝑀𝑑𝑣 = 𝑍𝑒
𝛾𝑚0
(For semi-compact section)

8) If M > Md , increase the section size and repeat from step 5.

9) The design shear strength (Vd) should be greater than the maximum
factored shear force developed due to external load. If V > Vd, redesign
the section by increasing the section size.
10) The beam is checked for deflection as per Table 6, IS 800: 2007.
11) The beam is checked for web buckling:
𝑑
If, ≤ 67𝜖 (for web without stiffeners) the web is assumed to be
𝑡𝑤
safe in web buckling and the shear strength of the web is governed
by plastic shear resistance.
The web should be checked for buckling in case of high shear even
if this limit is satisfied. The web buckling strength of the section,
fwb= Ab × fcd
Here, Ab = area of the web at the neutral axis of the beam = Btw
and fcd = design compressive stress
The web buckling strength should be greater than the design shear
force.

12) The beam is checked for web crippling,

Fwc > V
𝑏1 𝑡𝑤 𝑓𝑦𝑤
𝐹𝑤𝑐 =
𝛾𝑚0
Example:
A cantilever beam of length 4.5 m supports a dead load
(including self weight) of 18 kN/m and a live load of 12
kN/m. Assume a bearing length of 100 mm. Design the
beam.
Solution:

Step 1: Calculation of load

Dead load = 18 kN/m
Live load = 12 kN/m
Total load = (18 + 12) = 30 kN/m
Total factored load =1.5 (18 + 12) = 45 kN/m

Step 2: Calculation of BM and SF

𝑤𝑙 2 45×4.52
BM = = = 456 kN-m
2 2
SF = w×l = 45×4.5 = 202.5 kN

Step 3: Choosing a trial section

𝑀×𝛾𝑚0 456×106 ×1.1
𝑍𝑝,𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑑 = = = 2006.4×103 mm3
𝑓𝑦 250
Let us select the section ISLB 550 @ 0.846 kN/m
Zpz = 2228.16 × 103 mm3

Zez = 1933.2 × 103 mm3

h = 550 mm, bf = 190 mm, tf = 15 mm, tw = 9.9 mm, R = 18

d = 550 – 2×(15 + 18)
= 484 mm

Izz = 53161.6 × 104 mm4

Section classification

𝑏𝑓
2 95 𝑑 484
= = 6.33 < 9.4 = = 48.9< 84
𝑡𝑓 15 𝑡𝑤 9.9
Hence, the section is plastic
Step 4: Calculation of shear capacity of the section

𝑓𝑦 250
𝑉𝑑 = × ℎ × 𝑡𝑤 = × 550 × 9.9
𝛾𝑚0 × 3 1.1 × 3
= 714.47 kN
0.6𝑉𝑑 = 0.6 × 714.47 = 428.68 kN > 202.5 kN
Hence, Low shear

Step 5: Design capacity of the section

𝑍𝑝 × 𝑓𝑦 2228.16 × 103
𝑀𝑑 = = × 250
𝛾𝑚0 1.1
= 506.4 kNm

1.5×𝑍𝑒 ×𝑓𝑦 1.5×1933.2×103 ×250

≤ =
𝛾𝑚0 1.1
= 659.04 kNm
Step 6: Check for deflection

𝑤𝑙 4 30×45004
𝛿= = = 14.5 mm
8𝐸𝐼 8×2×105 ×53161.6×104

Allowable deflection = L/150 = 4500/150 = 30 mm

OK
Step 7: Web buckling
Cross sectional area of web for buckling 𝐴𝑏 = 𝑏1 + 𝑛1 𝑡𝑤
b1 = 100 mm
n1 = D/2=550/2 = 275 mm
Ab = (100 + 275) × 9.9
= 3712.5 mm2
Effective length of the web = 0.7 × d = 0.7 × 484= 338.8 mm
3
𝑏×𝑡𝑤 100×9.93
𝐼= = = 8085.8 mm3
12 12
A = 100 × 9.9 = 990 mm2
 8085.8
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛 = = 2.86 mm
990
𝑙𝑒𝑓𝑓 338.8
λ= = = 119
𝑟𝑚𝑖𝑛 2.85

Allowable stress fcd = 84.8 N/mm2

Capacity of the section = 84.8× 3712.5 = 314.8 kN > 202.5 kN
Hence, the section is safe against web buckling.

Step 8 : Check for web crippling

𝑏1 + 𝑛2 × 𝑡𝑤 × 𝑓𝑦
𝐹𝑤 =
𝛾𝑚0

n2 = 2.5 (R + tf) = 2.5(18 + 15) = 82.5 mm

100:82.5 ×9.9×250
𝐹𝑤 = = 410.6 kN > 202.5 kN
1.1
So the section is safe against web crippling
LATERALLY SUPPORTED BEAMS
WITH HIGH SHEAR
Example: Design a laterally supported beam of effective span 5 m
for the following data.
Grade of steel: Fe 410
Factored maximum B.M. = 180 kN-m
Factored maximum S. F. = 220 kN
Check for deflection is not required
Solution:
For Fe 410 grade of steel: fy = 250 MPa
Partial safety factor: m0 =1.1
Factored Max. B.M. = 180 kNm
Factored Max. S.F. = 220 kN
Plastic section modulus required,
𝑀𝛾𝑚0 180×106 ×1.1
𝑍𝑝,𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑑 = = = 792 × 103 mm3
𝑓𝑦 250

Let us select a section, ISLB 350 @ 0.485 kN/m

Zpz = 851.11 × 103 mm3 Ixx = 13158 × 104
Zez = 751.9 × 103 mm3
h = 350 mm, bf = 165 mm, tw = 7.4 mm, tf = 11.4 mm
R1= 16 mm
d = D - 2(tf + R1) = 350 - 2(11.4 + 16) = 295.2 mm
Section classification:
𝑏𝑓
2 165/2
= = 7.23 < 9.4
𝑡𝑓 11.4
𝑑 295.2
= = 39.9 < 84
𝑡𝑤 7.4
Hence, the section is plastic.

Check for shear capacity:

Design shear strength of the section,
𝑓𝑦 250
𝑉𝑑 = 𝐷𝑡𝑤 = × 350 × 7.4 × 10−3 = 339.8 kN >
3𝛾𝑚0 3×1.1
V=220 kN
0.6Vd = 0.6 × 339.8 = 203.9 kN < V=220 kN
So, it is the case of high shear.
Check for design bending strength:
𝑓𝑦 250
𝑀𝑑 = 𝑍𝑝𝑧 = 851.11 × 103 × × 10−6 = 193.43 kN-m
𝛾𝑚0 1.1
2 2
𝑉 220
𝛽 = 2 −1 = 2 −1 = 0.087
𝑉𝑑 339.8
350
𝑍𝑓𝑑 = 𝑍𝑝𝑍 − 𝐴𝑤 𝑌𝑤 = 851.11 × 103 − (350 × 7.4) ×
4
= 624.49 × 103 mm3
250
𝑀𝑓𝑑 = 624.49 × 103 × = 141.93 kNm
1.1
𝑓𝑦
𝑀𝑑𝑣 = 𝑀𝑑 − 𝛽 𝑀𝑑 − 𝑀𝑓𝑑 ≤ 1.2𝑍𝑒
𝛾𝑚0
𝑀𝑑𝑣 = 193.43 − 0.087 × 193.43 − 141.93 = 188.95 kNm
𝑓𝑦 250
≤ 1.2𝑍𝑒 = 1.2 × 751.9 × 103 × × 10−6 = 205.06 kNm
𝛾𝑚0 1.1

Hence, 𝑀𝑑𝑣 = 188.95 kNm > Mu=180 kNm, OK

Check for web buckling (at support)
Web buckling check is not required in general as
𝑑 295.2
= = 39.9 < 67ϵ
𝑡𝑤 7.4

However, it is a case of high shear, web buckling check should be

applied.
Assume a stiff bearing length, b = 100 mm
𝐴𝑏 = 𝐵1 𝑡𝑤 = 𝑏 + 𝑛 𝑡𝑤 = 100 + 350/2 × 7.4 = 2035 mm2
Effective length of web, KL = 0.7d = 0.7×295.2 = 206.64 mm
3
𝑏𝑡𝑤 100×7.43
Ieff of web = = = 3376.87 mm4
12 12
Aeff of web = btw = 100 × 7.4 = 740 mm2
3376.86
𝑟= =2.136 mm
740
𝐾𝐿 206.64
Slenderness ratio, λ = = = 96.74
𝑟 2.136
For λ= 96.74, fyw = 250 N/mm2 , and buckling curve c , the design
compressive stress from Table 9(c), IS 800: 2007.
fcd = 111.56 N/mm2
Capacity of web section Fwb = Abfcd = 2035 × 111.56 × 10-3 = 227 kN
> 220 kN
Which is alright.
Check for web crippling:
𝑓𝑦𝑤
𝐹𝑤 = (𝑏 + 𝑛1 )𝑡𝑤
𝛾𝑚0
𝑛1 = 2.5 𝑡𝑓 + 𝑅1
= 2.5 ×(11.4 + 16) = 68.5 mm
Stiff bearing length has been assumed, b = 100 mm
Fw = (100 + 68.5)×7.4×250/1.1×10-3 = 283.4 kN
> 220 kN, OK
LATERALLY UNSUPPORTED BEAMS
Laterally Unsupported Beam (Cl. 8.2.2, IS 800: 2007)

FACTORS AFFECTING LATERAL STABILITY

• Cross sectional shape

• Support conditions
• Effective length
 DESIGN STRENGTH

The design bending strength for laterally unsupported beams is

𝑀𝑑 = 𝛽𝑏 𝑍𝑝 𝑓𝑏𝑑
Where,
Zp = Plastic section modulus of the cross-section
βb = 1.0 for compact & plastic sections
= Ze/Zp for semi-compact sections
fbd = design bending compressive stress given by
Χ𝐿𝑇 𝑓𝑦
𝑓𝑏𝑑 =
𝛾𝑚0
ΧLT = bending stress reduction factor to account for lateral
torsion buckling
 1
Χ𝐿𝑇 = ≤ 1.0
∅𝐿𝑇 + ∅2𝐿𝑇 − λ2𝐿𝑇

Where, ∅𝐿𝑇 = 0.5 1 + 𝛼𝐿𝑇 λ𝐿𝑇 − 0.2 + λ2𝐿𝑇

𝛼LT = imperfection factor for lateral torsional
buckling of beams
= 0.21 for rolled steel sections
= 0.49 for welded steel sections
λLT = non-dimensional slenderness ratio given by,
𝛽𝑏 𝑍𝑝 𝑓𝑦 𝑍𝑒 𝑓𝑦
λ𝐿𝑇 = ≤ 1.2
𝑀𝑐𝑟 𝑀𝑐𝑟
𝑓𝑦
=
𝑓𝑐𝑟,𝑏
Where,
Mcr = elastic lateral buckling moment (Cl. 8.2.2.1) is given by,
𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼𝑦 𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼𝑤
𝑀𝑐𝑟 = 𝐺𝐼𝑡 + = 𝛽𝑏 𝑍𝑝 𝑓𝑐𝑟,𝑏
𝐿𝐿𝑇 2 𝐿𝐿𝑇 2

𝐼𝑡 = torsional constant = 𝑏𝑖 𝑡𝑖3 /3 for open section

𝐼𝑤 = warping constant
𝐼𝑦 = moment of inertia about weaker axis
𝑟𝑦 = radius of gyration about weaker axis
𝐿𝐿𝑇 =effective length for lateral torsional buckling (Clause 8.3)
ℎ𝑓 = centre-to-centre distance between flanges
𝑡𝑓 = thickness of flange
G = shear modulus
fcr,b = extreme fiber bending compressive stress corresponding to
elastic lateral buckling moment and is given by
2
𝐿𝐿𝑇
1.1𝜋 2 𝐸 1 𝑟𝑦
𝑓𝑐𝑟,𝑏 = 1+
𝐿𝐿𝑇 2 20 ℎ𝑓
𝑟𝑦 𝑡𝑓

For different values of KL/ry & ℎ𝑓 /tf corresponding values of fcr,b

is given in Table 14, IS 800:2007

Values of fbd can also be found from Table 13(a) and 13(b), IS
800: 2007 corresponds to different values of fcr,b and fy
The following simplified equation may be used in case of
prismatic members made of standard rolled I-sections and
welded doubly symmetric I-sections, for calculating the elastic
lateral buckling moment, 𝑀𝑐𝑟
2
𝐿𝐿𝑇
𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼𝑦 ℎ𝑓 1 𝑟𝑦
𝑀𝑐𝑟 = 1+
2𝐿𝐿𝑇 2 20 ℎ𝑓
𝑡𝑓
However, 𝑀𝑐𝑟 for different beam sections, considering
loading, support condition and non-symmetric section, shall
be more accurately calculated using the method given in
Annex E of IS:800-2007.
 STRENGTH CALCULATION OF
LATERALLY UNSUPPORTED BEAMS
 DESIGN STRENGTH

The design bending strength for laterally unsupported beams is

𝑀𝑑 = 𝛽𝑏 𝑍𝑝 𝑓𝑏𝑑
Where,
Zp = Plastic section modulus of the cross-section
βb = 1.0 for compact & plastic sections
= Ze/Zp for semi-compact sections
fbd = design bending compressive stress given by
Χ𝐿𝑇 𝑓𝑦
𝑓𝑏𝑑 =
𝛾𝑚0
ΧLT = bending stress reduction factor to account for lateral
torsion buckling
 1
Χ𝐿𝑇 = ≤ 1.0
∅𝐿𝑇 + ∅2𝐿𝑇 − λ2𝐿𝑇

Where, ∅𝐿𝑇 = 0.5 1 + 𝛼𝐿𝑇 λ𝐿𝑇 − 0.2 + λ2𝐿𝑇

𝛼LT = imperfection factor for lateral torsional
buckling of beams
= 0.21 for rolled steel sections
= 0.49 for welded steel sections
λLT = non-dimensional slenderness ratio given by,
𝛽𝑏 𝑍𝑝 𝑓𝑦 𝑍𝑒 𝑓𝑦
λ𝐿𝑇 = ≤ 1.2
𝑀𝑐𝑟 𝑀𝑐𝑟
𝑓𝑦
=
𝑓𝑐𝑟,𝑏
Where,
Mcr = elastic lateral buckling moment (Cl. 8.2.2.1) is given by,
𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼𝑦 𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼𝑤
𝑀𝑐𝑟 = 𝐺𝐼𝑡 + = 𝛽𝑏 𝑍𝑝 𝑓𝑐𝑟,𝑏
𝐿𝐿𝑇 2 𝐿𝐿𝑇 2

𝐼𝑡 = torsional constant = 𝑏𝑖 𝑡𝑖3 /3 for open section

𝐼𝑤 = warping constant
𝐼𝑦 = moment of inertia about weaker axis
𝑟𝑦 = radius of gyration about weaker axis
𝐿𝐿𝑇 =effective length for lateral torsional buckling (Clause 8.3)
ℎ𝑓 = centre-to-centre distance between flanges
𝑡𝑓 = thickness of flange
G = shear modulus
fcr,b = extreme fiber bending compressive stress corresponding to
elastic lateral buckling moment and is given by
2
𝐿𝐿𝑇
1.1𝜋 2 𝐸 1 𝑟𝑦
𝑓𝑐𝑟,𝑏 = 1+
𝐿𝐿𝑇 2 20 ℎ𝑓
𝑟𝑦 𝑡𝑓

For different values of KL/ry & ℎ𝑓 /tf corresponding values of fcr,b

is given in Table 14, IS 800:2007

Values of fbd can also be found from Table 13(a) and 13(b), IS
800: 2007 corresponds to different values of fcr,b and fy
Example: Calculate the design bending strength of ISLB 300
@ 0.369 kN/m considering the beam to be
(a) Laterally supported
(b) Laterally unsupported

Assume the design force is less the design shear strength and
is of low shear. The effective length of the beam (LLT) is 4 m.
Assume Fe410 grade of steel.
The relevant properties of ISLB 300

D = 300 mm, bf = 150 mm, tw = 6.7 mm, tf = 9.4 mm,

R1 = 15.0 mm
rx = 124 mm, ry = 28 mm
Zpz = 554.32 × 103 mm3, Zez = 488.9 × 103 mm3,
Iz = 7333 × 104 mm4, Iy = 376 × 104 mm4

d = D – 2(tf + R1) = 300 – 2(9.4 + 15) = 251.2 mm

For rolled section: αLT = 0.21

For Fe 410 grade of steel: fy = 250 MPa

Partial safety factor: m0 = 1.10
𝑏 150/2
= = 7.98 < 9.4
𝑡𝑓 9.4
𝑑 251.2
= = 37.49 < 84
𝑡𝑤 6.7
Hence, the section is plastic.
𝑑 251.2
Since, = = 37.49 < 67ϵ
𝑡𝑤 6.7
Shear buckling check of web will not be required.

(a) Laterally supported beam

For low shear,
𝑓𝑦 250
𝑀𝑑 = 𝛽𝑏 𝑍𝑝 = 1.0 × 554.32 × 103 × = 125.98 kN-m
𝛾𝑚0 1.1
𝑓𝑦 250
≤ 1.2𝑍𝑒 = 1.2 × 488.9 × 103 × = 133.34 kN-m
𝑦𝑚0 1.1
Hence, design bending strength = 125.98 kN
(b) Laterally unsupported beam
𝜋2 𝐸𝐼𝑦 𝜋2 𝐸𝐼𝑤
𝑀𝑐𝑟 = 𝐺𝐼𝑡 +
𝐿𝐿𝑇 2 𝐿𝐿𝑇 2
LLT = 4000 mm
𝐸 2 × 105
𝐺= = = 76.92 × 103
2(1 + 𝜇) 2 × (1 + 0.3)

𝑏𝑖 𝑡𝑖3
Torsional constant, 𝐼𝑡 =
3
150×9.43 (300−2×9.4)×6.73
= 2× +
3 3
= 4
11.12 × 10 mm4

Warping constant, 𝐼𝑤 = 1 − 𝛽𝑓 𝛽𝑓 𝐼𝑦 ℎ𝑓2

Here, ℎ𝑓 = c/c distance between flanges =D - 𝑡𝑓 =300-9.4 = 290.6
 𝐼𝑓𝑐
𝛽𝑓 = =0.5 [Since 𝐼𝑓𝑐 = 𝐼𝑓𝑡 ]
𝐼𝑓𝑐 +𝐼𝑓𝑡

Thus, 𝐼𝑤 = (1 − 0.5) × 0.5 × 376 × 104 × 290.62

= 7.94 × 1010 mm6

𝜋 2 × 2 × 105 × 376 × 104

40002
𝑀𝑐𝑟 = 2 × 2 × 105 × 7.94 × 1010
𝜋
76.92 × 103 × 11.22 × 104 +
40002

= 92.45 kNm
Or,
2 0.5
𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼𝑦 ℎ𝑓 1 𝐿𝐿𝑇 /𝑟𝑦
𝑀𝑐𝑟 = 1+
2𝐿2𝐿𝑇 20 ℎ𝑓 /𝑡𝑓
2 5 4 2 0.5
𝜋 × 2 × 10 × 376 × 10 × 290.6 1 4000/28
= 2
1+
2 × 4000 20 290.6/9.4
= 96.92 kNm

𝛽𝑏 𝑍𝑝𝑧 𝑓𝑦 1×554.32×103 ×250

λ𝐿𝑇 = = = 1.22 > 0.4
𝑀𝑐𝑟 92.45×106
So, the effect of lateral torsional buckling has to be considered.

∅𝐿𝑇 = 0.5 1 + 𝛼𝐿𝑇 λ𝐿𝑇 − 0.2 + λ2𝐿𝑇

∅𝐿𝑇 = 0.5 1 + 0.21 1.22 − 0.2 + 1.222

= 1.35
 1
Χ𝐿𝑇 = ≤ 1.0
∅𝐿𝑇 + ∅2𝐿𝑇 − λ2𝐿𝑇

1
=
1.35 + 1.352 − 1.222
= 0.52

Χ𝐿𝑇 𝑓𝑦
𝑓𝑏𝑑 =
𝛾𝑚0
0.52 × 250
=
1.1
= 118.2 N/mm2

𝑀𝑑 = 1 × 554.32 × 103 × 118.2 × 10−6 = 65.52 kN-m

Using Table
ℎ𝑓 290.6
1. KL/ry = 4000/28 = 142.86, = = 30.9
𝑡𝑓 9.4
For fy = 250 N/mm2, from Table 14, fcr,b = 155 N/mm2

2
𝐿𝐿𝑇
1.1𝜋2 𝐸 1 𝑟𝑦
Using equations: 𝑓𝑐𝑟,𝑏 = 2 1+ ℎ𝑓
𝐿𝐿𝑇 20
𝑟𝑦 𝑡𝑓

2
1.1𝜋2 ×2×105 1 4000 28
𝑓𝑐𝑟,𝑏 = 4000 1+ = 153 N/mm2
28
2 20 290.6 9.4

For, fcr,b = 155 N/mm2 and fy = 250 N/mm2 and αLT = 0.21 , from
Table 13(a), IS 800: 2007, fbd = 109.53 N/mm2
Md = 1 × 554.32 × 103 × 107.59 = 60.71 kN-m
𝑀𝑑 = 65.52 kN-m (Using expressions)
DESIGN OF LATERALLY
UNSUPPORTED BEAMS
Design Steps of Laterally Unsupported Beams:
1) The service load and factored loads are calculated. The
Maximum factored bending moment and shear force is
determined.

2) A trial plastic section for the beam is calculated from the

following equation:
𝑀𝑑
𝑍𝑝 =
𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0
Since a higher plastic section modulus is necessary to account
for lateral torsional buckling, the 𝑍𝑝 may be increased by 40%
to 60% for steel rolled section.

3) A suitable section is selected based on the increased plastic

section modulus.
4) The beam is checked for shear: 𝑉 ≤ 𝑉𝑑
5) The beam is checked for deflection as per Table 6 of
the code

6) The beam is checked for web buckling

7) The beam is checked for web buckling

Example: Design a simply supported steel joist of 5 m effective
span, carrying a uniformly distributed load 12 kN/m if
compression flange of the joist is laterally unrestrained.
Solution
Step-1: BM & SF on beam
Load on the beam = 12 kN/m
Factored load = 12 × 1.5 = 18 kN/m
Max. B. M. = 18 × 52/8 kN-m
= 56.25 kN-m
Max S. F. = 18 × 5/2
= 45 kN

Step-2: Selection of initial section,

𝑀 56.25 × 106
𝑍𝑝 = = = 247.5 × 103 𝑘𝑁𝑚
𝑓𝑦 /𝛾𝑚0 250/1.1
Increasing 50%, the required 𝑍𝑝 will be 1.5× 247.5 × 103
= 371.25 × 103 𝑘𝑁𝑚
Step-3 : Calculate bending strength of section,
Select ISHB 200 @ 40 kg/m
D = 200 mm ry = 44.2 mm Zpz = 414.23 × 103 mm3
bf = 200 mm R1 = 9 mm Zez = 372.2 × 103 mm3
tf = 9.0 mm
tw = 7.8 mm
d = 200 – 2×(9+9) = 164 mm

After calculation it is seen that the section is not adequate and need to
increase the section size to ISLB 325…

Select ISLB 325

D = 325 mm ry = 30.5 mm Zpz = 687.76 × 103 mm3
bf = 165 mm R1 = 16 mm Zez = 607.7 × 103 mm3
tf = 9.8 mm Ixx = 9870 × 104 mm4
tw = 7.0 mm Iyy = 510.8 × 104 mm4
d = 325 – 2×(9.8+16) = 273.4 mm
Section classification:
b/tf = 82.5/9.8 = 8.41 < 9.4
d/tw = 273.4/7.0 = 39 < 84
Hence, section is plastic.

Calculation of bending strength:

KL/ry = 5000/30.5 hf/tf = (325 – 9.8 )/9.8
= 164 = 32.16
From Table 14, IS 800: 2007
fcr,b = 122.82 N/mm2
From Table 13(a), IS 800: 2007,
fbd = 93.17 N/mm2

So, Md = 1×687.76×103×93.17
= 58.57 kN-m > 56.25 kN-m
OK.
Step-4: Check for shear:
Design shear strength of the section,
𝑓𝑦 250
𝑉𝑑 = 𝐷𝑡𝑤 = × 325 × 7 × 10;3 = 299 kN > V=45 kN
3𝛾𝑚0 3×1.1

Step-5: Check for deflection:

5𝑤𝑙 4 5×12×50004
𝛿= = = 4.9 mm
384𝐸𝐼 384×2×105 ×9870×104
Allowable maximum deflection, L/300 = 5000/300 = 16.67 mm.
Hence, safe against deflection.

Step-6: Check for web buckling:

Assuming stiff bearing length 100 mm
n1 = D/2 = 325/2 = 162.5 mm
C/S area for web buckling Ab = (b + n1) × tw
= (100 + 162.5) × 7.0 = 1837.5 mm
Effective length of web, leff = 0.7 × 273.4 = 191.38 mm
I = 100 × 73/12 = 2858.33 mm3
A = b × tw = 100 × 7 = 700 mm2
2858.33
rmin = = 2.02
700
λ = leff/rmin = 191.38/2.02 = 94.742
From Table 9(c), IS 800: 2007, fcd = 114.364 N/mm2
Capacity of the section, Ab × fcd = 1837.5 × 114.364 = 210 kN
> 45 kN
Hence, the section is safe against web buckling.

Step-7: Check for web crippling:

𝑏1 + 𝑛2 × 𝑡𝑤 × 𝑓𝑦
𝐹𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑝 =
𝛾𝑚0
𝑛2 = 2.5 16 + 9.8 = 64.5 mm
100:64.5 ×7×250
𝐹𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑝 = =261.70 kN > 45 kN
1.1
Hence, the section is safe against web crippling
DESIGN OF BEAM WITH GUI BASED
MATLAB ALGORITHM
CALCULATION OF PLASTIC
SECTION MODULUS
Example: Determine the plastic section modulus of ISLB 300 @
0.369 kN/m about the strong and weak axis (neglecting the
fillets)

For symmetrical I-section the equal area axis zz and yy will pass
through the centroid of the section.
 𝐷 − 𝑡𝑓
𝑍𝑝𝑧 = 2 𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑓 ×
2
𝐷
𝐷 − 𝑡𝑓
+ 2 𝑡𝑤 × − 𝑡𝑓 × 2
2 2
𝑡𝑤 (𝐷−2𝑡𝑓 )2
= 𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑓 𝐷 − 𝑡𝑓 +
4

𝑏𝑓 𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑤 𝑡𝑤
𝑍𝑝𝑦 = 4 × × 𝑡𝑓 × + 2 × (𝐷 − 2𝑡𝑓 ) × ×
2 4 2 4
𝑡𝑓 𝑏𝑓2 2
(𝐷−2𝑡𝑓 )𝑡𝑤
= +
2 4
The relevant properties of ISLB 300 @ 0.369 kN/m.
D = 300 mm, bf = 150 mm, tw = 6.7 mm, tf = 9.4 mm,
𝑡𝑤 (𝐷 − 2𝑡𝑓 )2
𝑍𝑝𝑧 = 𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑓 𝐷 − 𝑡𝑓 +
4
6.7 × (300 − 2 × 9.4)2
= 150 × 9.4 × 300 − 9.4 +
4
= 542.2 × 103 mm3

𝑡𝑓 𝑏𝑓2 (𝐷 − 2𝑡𝑓 )𝑡𝑤

2
𝑍𝑝𝑦 = +
2 4
9.4×1502 (300−2×9.4)×6.72
= +
2 4
= 108.9 × 103 mm3
Example: Steel beams having a clear span of 8 m are resting on
200 mm wide end bearings. The beams spacing is 3 m and the
beams carry a dead load of 4.5 kN/m2 including the weight of
the section. The imposed load on the beam is 13.25 kN/m2. The
beam depth is restricted to 500 mm and the yield strength of the
steel is 250 N/mm2 and is laterally supported.
Solution:
Factored loads:
Total (Dead Load + Imposed load) = (4.5+ 13.25)=17.75 kN/m2
The beams are spaced at 3 m intervals, therefore the load per meter
= 17.75 × 3 = 53.25 kN/m2
Total factored load = 1.5× 53.25 = 80 kN/m
Eff. Span = 8 + 2×0.1 = 8.2 m

Mid span moment = 80 × 8.22/8 = 672.8 kN-m

Reactions at support = 8.2 × 80/2 = 328 kN
Selection of section:
Plastic section modulus required
𝑀×𝛾𝑚0 672.8×106 ×1.1
𝑍𝑝 = = = 2960.32 × 103 mm3
𝑓𝑦 250
The section with largest plastic modulus under 500 mm depth
restriction is ISHB 450 @ 0.907 kN/m with plastic section modulus
2030.95 × 103 mm3 which is less than required value. The section
must be strengthened with additional plates to provide the required
plastic section modulus.

The stiffness required to be provided can be calculated as follows:

Max. deflection = Eff. span/360 = 8200/360 = 22.78 mm
So, required moment of inertia of the beam due to un-factored
imposed load,
5 53.25×82004 4
𝐼𝑍 = × 5 = 68807 × 10 mm 4
384 2×10 ×22.78

Additional plastic section modulus to be provided by the plate =

(2960.32×103 – 2030.95×103) = 929.37×103 mm3
Assume thickness of the plate is 14 mm
Thus, the total depth of the beam = 478 mm.
Distance between the c/c of the plates = 464 mm.

So, required area of plate = 929.37×103 /464 = 2003 mm2

So provide area of plate = 2200 mm2.
Thus the width of plate = 2200/14 = 158 mm
Thus let provide plate of size 200×14
Thus plastic section modulus of the built up section =
2030.95×103 +200×14×464/2×2 = 3330×103 mm3
This is greater than required plastic section modulus 2960.32 ×
103 . OK

Check for deflection:

Maximum Iz required is 68807 × 104 mm4
Iz provided by ISHB 450, 40349.9×104 mm4
Iz provided by plate = 2×200×14×(225+7)2 = 30141× 104 mm4
Total Iz provided = (40349.9×104 + 30141× 104 ) = 70490.9×104
mm4 greater than Iz required (= 68807 × 104 ) OK

Moment capacity of the beam ISHB 450,

M = 2030.95 × 103 × 250/1.1 = 461.58 kN-m
At any point distance x from the support,
461.58×106 = 328×103x – 80x2/2
or, x = 6396.5 , 1803.05
Hence the theoretical cut off point is 1800 mm from either side.

Check for Shear:

Shear capacity of section,
𝑓𝑦 250
𝑉𝑑 = × 𝐷 × 𝑡𝑤 = × 450 × 11.3 = 667.23 kN
𝛾𝑚0 × 3 1.1× 3

0.6Vd = 0.6×667.23 = 400.33 kN > 328 kN. Low shear OK

PURLINS
PURLINS
 DESIGN OF PURLINS

𝑀𝑢 = 𝑃′𝐿/10 and 𝑀𝑣 = 𝐻′𝐿/10

Mu = maximum bending moment about u-u axis.

Mv = maximum bending moment about v-v axis.

P’ = gravity loads acting along v-v axis, including sheeting, self

weight of purlins, LL & snow loads = H + 𝑃𝑐𝑜𝑠θ.

H’ = loads acting along u-u axis, including wind loads= 𝑃𝑠𝑖𝑛θ

L = span of the purlin, i.e. c/c distance of adjacent trusses

Muu = H + 𝑃𝑐𝑜𝑠θ 𝐿/10 Mvv = 𝑃𝑠𝑖𝑛θ 𝐿/10

For biaxial moment of channel and I-sections the
interaction formula is given by

𝑀𝑢 𝑀𝑣
+ ≤ 1.0
𝑀𝑑𝑢 𝑀𝑑𝑣

Where,
Mdu = design bending moment about u-u axis

Mdv = design bending moment about v-v axis

 BIAXIAL BENDING
Purlins are subjected to bi-axial bending. A trial section may be
obtained arbitrarily or the expression given by Gaylord et al.
(1992) as follows:
𝑀𝑍 𝛾𝑚0 𝑀𝑦 𝛾𝑚0 𝑑
𝑍𝑝𝑍 = + × 2.5 ×
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦 𝑏𝑓
Where,
Zpz = required plastic section modulus
My = factored bending moment about y-y axis
Mz = factored bending moment about z-z axis
fy = Yield stress of the material
d = depth of the section
bf = width of the section
 Design procedure for channel/I section purlins

1. The span of the purlin is taken as c/c distance of adjacent

trusses

2. The gravity loads P and wind loads H are computed. The

component of these loads in the direction parallel &
perpendicular to the sheeting are determined. These loads
are multiplied with partial safety factor for loads as per Table
4 of the code for various load combinations

3. The maximum B.M. (Mz or Muu and My or Mvv) and S.F. (Fz
and Fy) using the factored loads are determined
4. The required value of plastic section modulus of the section
may be determined by using the following equation
𝑀𝑍 𝛾𝑚0 𝑀𝑦 𝛾𝑚0 𝑑
𝑍𝑝,𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑑 = + × 2.5 ×
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦 𝑏𝑓
where
My = Factored bending moment about y-y axis
Mz = Factored bending moment about z-z axis
fy = Yield stress of steel
γm0 = Partial safety factor = 1.10
d = Depth of the trial section
bf = Width of the trial section

Since the above equation uses both width & depth of a section, we
must use a trial section & check for its adequacy.
5. Check for the section classification as per Table 2: IS 800:
2007 .
6. Check for shear capacity of the section for both z and y axes
taken as (Moris & Plum 1996)
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝑉𝑑𝑦 = 𝐴𝑣𝑦 and 𝑉𝑑𝑧 = 𝐴𝑣𝑧
3𝛾𝑚0 3𝛾𝑚0

𝐴𝑣𝑧 = 𝐷𝑡𝑤 and 𝐴𝑣𝑦 = 2𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑓

where
D = height of the section
tw = thickness of the web
bf = breadth of the flange
tf = thickness of the flange
7. Compute the design capacity of the section in both the axes
using
𝑍𝑝𝑧 𝑓𝑦 𝑍𝑒𝑧 𝑓𝑦 𝑍𝑝𝑦 𝑓𝑦 𝑍𝑒𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝑀𝑑𝑧 = ≤ 1.2 𝑀𝑑𝑦 = ≤ 1.2
𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚0

8. Check for local capacity using the interaction formula

𝑀𝑍 𝑀𝑦
+ ≤ 1.0
𝑀𝑑𝑧 𝑀𝑑𝑦

9. Check whether deflection is under permissible limits (l/180) as

per Table 6, IS 800: 2007.
The following procedure is adopted for the design :

1. The vertical and the wind loads are determined. These loads
are assumed to be normal to roof truss.
2. The maximum bending moment is computed.

𝑤𝐿2 𝑊𝐿
𝑀𝑢 = 𝑜𝑟
10 10

where L = span of purlin

w = uniformly distributed load
W = concentrated load at centroid
3. The required section modulus is calculated by
𝑀
𝑍𝑝,𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑑 =
1.33 × 0.66 × 𝑓𝑦

4. Assuming the depth = 1/45 of the span and width = 1/60

of the span, a trial section of angle purlins is arrived by.

The depth and width must not be less than the specified
values to ensure the deflection criteria.

5. A suitable section is then selected for the calculated value

of leg lengths of angle section. The modulus of section
provided should be more than modulus of section
calculated.
DESIGN OF PURLINS
Example: Design an I-section purlin, for an industrial building
situated in the outskirt of Kolkata, to support a galvanized iron
sheet roof for the following data:
Slope of truss = 30o
Spacing of truss c/c = 5.0 m
Span of truss = 12.0 m
spacing of purlins c/c = 2 m
wind speed = 50 m/s
Weight of galvanized sheets = 120 N/m2
Grade of steel = Fe 410
Solution:
For steel of grade Fe 410: fy = 250 MPa
Weight of galvanized corrugated iron sheets = 120 × 2 = 240 N/m
Assume dead load of purlin = 100 N/m
Total dead load = 240 + 100 = 340 N/m
The dead load acts vertically downwards.
The component of dead load parallel to roof = 340sin30° = 170 N/m
The component of dead load normal to roof = 340cos30° = 294.5 N/m
Wind pressure = 𝑝𝑧 = 0.6𝑉2𝑧 = 0.6 × 502 = 1500 𝑁/𝑚2
Wind load is assumed to act normal to the roof.
Wind load = 1500×2×1 = 3000 N/m
Total load on purlin normal to roof = 3000+294.5 = 3294.5 N/m
Factored load normal to roof,
P = 1.5×3294.5 = 4941.75 N/m
Factored load parallel to roof,
H = 1.5×170 = 255 N/m
Maximum moment,
Muu = Mz = PL/10 = (4941.75×5)×5×10-3 /10 =12.35 kNm
Mvv = My = HL/10 = (255×5)×5×10-3 /10 =0.6375 kNm
Let us try a section with flange width bf = 75 mm and depth, d = 125
mm.
Plastic section modulus required,
𝛾𝑚0 𝑑 𝛾𝑚0
𝑍𝑝𝑧, 𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑑 = 𝑀𝑧 + 2.5 𝑀𝑦
𝑓𝑦 𝑏 𝑓𝑦
𝑍𝑝𝑧, 𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑑
6
1.1 125 6
1.1
= 12.35 × 10 × + 2.5 0.6375 × 10 ×
250 75 250
= 66 × 103 mm3
Select a section ISLB 150 with Zpz = 104.5 × 103 mm3
A= 1808 mm2, D = 150 mm, bf = 80 mm, tf = 6.8 mm, tw = 4.8 mm
R1 = 9.5 mm,
d = 150 – 2(6.8+9.5) = 117.4 mm
Iz = 688.2 × 104 mm4 , Iy = 55.2× 104 mm4
Zez = 91.8 × 103 mm3, Zey = 13.8 × 103 mm3

Section classification
250 250
𝜖= = =1
𝑓𝑦 250
b/tf = 40/6.8 = 5.88 < 9.4
d/tw = 117.4/4.8 = 24.5 < 84
Hence the section is plastic.

Check for bending strength

𝑓𝑦 250
𝑀𝑑𝑧 = 𝑍𝑝𝑧 = 104.5 × 103 × × 10−6 = 23.75 kN-m
𝛾𝑚0 1.1
𝑓𝑦 250
< 1.2𝑍𝑒𝑧 = 1.2 × 91.8 × 103 × × 10−6 = 25.04 kN-m
𝛾𝑚0 1.1
Which is alright.
𝑀𝑑𝑧 = 23.75 kN-m > 𝑀𝑑 = 12.35 kNm; OK
 𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝑀𝑑𝑦 = 𝑍𝑝𝑦 × ≤ 𝛾𝑓 𝑍𝑒𝑦
𝛾𝑚0 𝛾𝑚0

𝑏𝑓 𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑤 𝑡𝑤
𝑍𝑝𝑦 = 4 × × 𝑡𝑓 × + 2 × (𝐷 − 2𝑡𝑓 ) × ×
2 4 2 4
𝑡𝑓 𝑏𝑓2 (𝐷 − 2𝑡𝑓 )𝑡𝑤
2
6.8 × 802 (150 − 2 × 6.8)4.82
𝑍𝑝𝑦 = + = +
2 4 2 4
=22546 mm3

Mdy = 22546 × 250/1.1 × 10-6 = 5.12 kN-m

< 1.5 × 13.8 × 103 × 250/1.1 × 10-6 = 4.7 kN-m
(1.2 is replaced by 𝛾𝑓 =1.5 since Zpy/Zey (=1.6)> 1.2)

Hence, Mdy = 4.7 kN-m > Md = 0.6375 kN-m; OK

Check for overall member strength (local capacity)
𝑀𝑧 𝑀𝑦
+ ≤1
𝑀𝑑𝑧 𝑀𝑑𝑦
12.35 0.6375
+ = 0.66 < 1; OK
23.75 4.7

Check for deflection

δall = 5000/180 = 27.78 mm

Δ = 1/384 × wl4/EI
= (3294.5 × 10-3 × 50004)/ (384 × 2 × 105 × 688.2 × 104)
= 4 mm < δall ; OK.
INTRODUCTION TO
GANTRY GIRDERS
 Gantry girders are examples of laterally unsupported beams in
industrial buildings.

 In mills and heavy industrial buildings such as factories and

workshops, gantry girders are supported by columns and
carrying cranes. These are used to handle and transport heavy
goods, equipment etc.

 The overhead travelling crane runway system consists of the

following components:
(i) The crane, comprising the crane girder, crab or trolley, hoist,
power transmitting devices, and a cab which houses the
control and operator.
(ii) The crane rails and their attachments.
(iii) The gantry girder
(iv) Colum with brackets supporting gantry girder
 LOADS
The following imposed loads should be considered in the design.
1. Vertical loads from the cranes.
2. Impact loads from crane.
3. Longitudinal horizontal force along the crane rail.
4. Lateral thrust across the crane rail

In calculating the above forces crane should be positioned such

that it gives maximum design forces in the girder.
ADDITIONAL IMPACT LOADS
Type of load
Vertical loads
(i) For electric overhead cranes
(ii) For hand operated cranes
Horizontal forces transverse to
rails
(i) For electric overhead cranes
(ii) For hand operated cranes
Horizontal forces along rail
Additional load
25% of the maximum static wheel load
10% of the maximum static wheel load
10% of the wt of crab & the wt
lifted on the crane
5% of the wt of crab & the wt
lifted on the crane
5% of the static wheel load
 LATERAL LOAD
 As the crane moves with the load, a lateral load (transverse
to the rail) is developed due to application of brakes or
sudden acceleration of trolley.

 IS 875 recommends 10% of W for EOT cranes as horizontal

loads, where W is the total weight including lifted weight
and the trolley weight.

LONGITUDINAL LOAD
 As the crane moves longitudinally, loads parallel to the rails are
caused due to the braking (stopping) or acceleration and swing
(starting of the crane). This load is called the longitudinal load
and is transferred at the rail level.

 The longitudinal load per wheel = 5% of the wheel load,

i.e., Wg = 5W/100
Permissible Deflection (Table 6, IS 800:2007)
Category Max.
Deflection
a. Where manually operated cranes are operated L/500
and for similar loads.
b. Where electric overhead traveling cranes L/750
operate, up to 50t.
c. Where electric overhead traveling cranes L/1000
operate, over 50t
d. Other moving loads such as charging cars, etc. L/600
e. Lateral deflection 10 mm or
Relative between rails L/400
MAXIMUM LOAD EFFECTS
Position of Crane Hook for Maximum Vertical Load on Gantry
Girder
The maximum vertical load on gantry girder is the maximum reaction of crane
girder. To get this, crab should be placed as close to gantry girder as possible.
If , LC = Span of crane girder
L1 = Minimum approach of crane hook (distance between c.g. of gantry girder and
trolley).
W = weight of trolley plus the weight lifted
w = weight of crane girder per unit length
𝑤𝐿𝑐 𝑊𝑡 (𝐿𝑐 − 𝐿1 )
𝑅𝐴 = +
2 𝐿𝑐
Position of Crane Wheels for Maximum Effects on
Gantry Girder

Positions of wheels for maximum moment on gantry girder

Positions of wheels for maximum shear on gantry girder
FATIGUE EFFECTS

Gantry girders cause moving loads that cause fatigue. Fatigue effects
for light and medium duty cranes need not to be checked, if normal
and shear stress ranges,
𝟐𝟕
𝒇≤
𝜸𝒎𝒇𝒕
Or, if actual number of stress cycle,
𝟑
𝟔
𝟐𝟕/𝜸 𝒎𝒇𝒕
𝑵𝑺𝑪 < 𝟓 × 𝟏𝟎
𝜸𝒎 𝒇
For heavy duty crane, the gantry girder must be checked for fatigue.

𝜸𝒎𝒇𝒕 = partial safety factor for strength (Table 25 of IS 800-2007)

f = actual fatigue stress range
𝜸𝒎 = partial safety factor for materail = 1.10
Normal stress range
𝟑
𝒇𝒇 = 𝒇𝒇𝒏 𝟓 × 𝟏𝟎𝟔 /𝑵𝒔𝒄 for 𝑵𝒔𝒄 ≤ 𝟓 × 𝟏𝟎𝟔

and,
𝟓
𝒇𝒇 = 𝒇𝒇𝒏 𝟓 × 𝟏𝟎𝟔 /𝑵𝒔𝒄 for 𝟓 × 𝟏𝟎𝟔 ≤ 𝑵𝒔𝒄 ≤ 𝟏𝟎𝟖

Shear stress range

𝟓
𝝉𝒇 = 𝝉𝒇𝒏 𝟓 × 𝟏𝟎𝟔 /𝑵𝒔𝒄

Where, 𝑓𝑓 , 𝜏𝑓 =design normal and shear fatigue stress range of the

details , respectively for life cycle of NSC
𝑓𝑓𝑛 , 𝜏𝑓𝑛 = normal and shear fatigue strength of the details for 5 ×
106 cycles for the detail category.
DESIGN OF GANTRY GIRDER
DESIGN PROCEDURE
1. Maximum wheel load is calculated. Maximum vertical load
will be when one wheel is closest to the gantry girder.

2. With suitable positioning of crane, determine the maximum

moment and shear force on gantry girder. Add impact load
contribution to it. Though the maximum moment due to
wheel load is slightly away from the centre of the girder
(under the wheel), it is just added to maximum moment due
to udl on girder for simplification and design moment is
found.

3. Calculate maximum shear forces due to vertical load.

4. The lateral forces on girder are calculated. The maximum

bending moment and shear force are obtained when the
position of the wheel is considered as per Steps 2 and 3.
5. Generally an I-section with channel section is chosen, though
an I-section with a plate at the top flange may be used for
𝑴𝒖
light cranes. 𝒁𝒑 = ,
𝒇𝒚
When the gantry is not laterally supported, the following may
be used to select a trial section:
𝒁𝒑 𝒕𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒍 = 𝒌𝒁𝒑 (k = 1.30 – 1.60)
Generally, the economic depth of a gantry girder is about
(1/12)th of the span. The width of the flange is chosen to be
between (1/40)th and (1/30)th of the span to prevent excessive
lateral deflection.

6. Choose a suitable section and find properties of the section

such as IZZ , IYY and Zez , Zey, Zpy ,Zpz.

7. Classify the section from b/tf and d/tw ratios.

9. When lateral support is provided at the compression flange,
the chosen section should be checked for the moment capacity of
the whole section:
𝑴𝒅𝒛 = 𝜷𝒃 𝒁𝒑𝒛 𝒇𝒚 /𝜸𝒎𝟎 < 𝟏. 𝟐𝒁𝒆𝒛 𝒇𝒚 /𝜸𝒎𝟎
However, for laterally unsupported compression flange, the
buckling resistance is to be checked with design bending
compressive stress fbd .

10. Bending strength about yy axis is calculated because of later

loading:
𝑴𝒅𝒚 = 𝜷𝒃 𝒁𝒑𝒚 𝒇𝒚 /𝜸𝒎𝟎 < 𝟏. 𝟐𝒁𝒆𝒛 𝒇𝒚 /𝜸𝒎𝟎
11. Combined local capacity of the flange is checked using the
interaction equation
𝑴𝒚 𝑴𝒛
+ ≤𝟏
𝑴𝒅𝒚 𝑴𝒅𝒛
12. The section is to be checked against shear.

13. Local buckling will be checked under wheel load.

14. The girder needs to be checked for bearing. Bearing stiffness

will be provided if necessary.

15. The maximum deflection under working load must be checked.

16. The girder is checked for fatigue strength.

Example:
Design a simply supported gantry girder to carry electric overhead
travelling crane, given:
Span of gantry girder = 6 m
Span of crane girder = 15 m
Crane capacity = 200 kN
Self weight of trolley, hook, electric motor etc. = 40 kN
Self weight of crane girder excluding trolley = 200 kN
Minimum hook approach = 1.0 m
Distance between wheels = 3 m
Self weight of rails = 0.2 kN/m
WORKED OUT EXAMPLE FOR
GANTRY GIRDER
Example:
Design a simply supported gantry girder to carry electric overhead
travelling crane, given:
Span of gantry girder = 6 m
Span of crane girder = 15 m
Crane capacity = 200 kN
Self weight of trolley, hook, electric motor etc. = 40 kN
Self weight of crane girder excluding trolley = 200 kN
Minimum hook approach = 1.0 m
Distance between wheels = 3 m
Self weight of rails = 0.2 kN/m
Solution:

Maximum moment due to vertical force

Weight of trolley + lifted load = 40 + 200 = 240 kN
Self weight of crane girder = 200 kN
For maximum reaction on gantry girder, the moving load should be
as close the gantry as possible.
Figure below shows the load position
 240×14 200
𝑅𝐴 = + = 324 kN
15 2

This load is transferred to gantry girder, through two wheels, the

wheel base being 3 m.

So load on gantry girder from each wheel = 324/2 = 162 kN

Factored wheel load = 162 × 1.5 = 243 kN

Maximum moments due to moving loads occur under a wheel

when the c.g. of wheel load and the wheel are equidistant from
the centre of girder. This is shown in figure:
 243×(3−1.5−0.75)+243×(3+0.75)
𝑅𝐷 = = 182.25 kN
6

Max. moment ME = 182.25 × 2.25 = 410 kN-m

Moment due to impact = 0.25 × 410 = 102.5 kN-m

Assume self weight of girder = 2 kN/m

Dead load due to self weight + rails = 2 + 0.2 = 2.2 kN/m

Factored DL = 2.2 × 1.5 = 3.3 kN/m

Moment due to DL = 3.3 × 62/8 = 14.85 kN-m

Factored moment due to all vertical loads,

Mz = 410 + 102.5 + 14.85 = 527.35 kN-m
Maximum moment due to lateral force
Horizontal force transferred to rails = 10% of weight of
trolley plus load lifted = (10/100) × (200 + 40) = 24 kN

This is distributed over 4 wheels.

So, horizontal force on each wheel = 24/4 = 6 kN

Factored horizontal force on each wheel = 1.5 × 6 = 9 kN

For maximum moment in gantry girder the position of loads is

same as earlier except that it is horizontal. Hence by
proportioning we get,

My = (9/243) × 410 = 15.18 kN-m

 Shear force

For maximum shear force on the girder, the trailing wheel

should be just on the girder as shown in figure below

Vertical shear due to wheel loads = 243 + (243 × 3)/6 = 364.5 kN

Vertical shear due to impact = 0.25 × 364.5 = 91.125 kN

Vertical shear due to self weight = (3.3 × 6)/2 = 9.9 kN

Total vertical shear = 364.5 + 91.125 + 9.9 = 465.52 kN

By proportioning lateral shear due to surge = (9/243) × 465.52

= 17.24 kN
Preliminary Section

Minimum economic depth, L/12 = 6000/12 = 500 mm

Width of the compression flange may be taken as (1/40) to

(1/30)th of the span

So, flange width can be taken, L/40 = 6000/40 = 150 mm to L/30

= 6000/30 = 200 mm

Required Zp = 1.4 × M/fy = 1.4 × 527.35 × 106/250 = 2953.16 ×

103 mm3

Let us try a ISMB 550 with ISMC 250 on compression flange.

SLAB BASE
 Column Base
• A column base consist of a column, a base plate and an
anchoring assembly.

• The column base is usually supported by either a concrete slab

or a sub-structure (e.g. a piled foundation)

• The main function of column base is to transfer the loads from

column to its foundation blocks.

• The column base spreads the load on wider area so that the
intensity of bearing pressure on the foundation block is within
the bearing strength.
 Types of column bases

1. Slab base
2. Gusseted base
 Slab base
• A slab base consists of a thick steel base plate placed
over a concrete base & connected to it through bolts.

• The base plate may either be welded to the stanchion or

else may be joined to the column through cleat angle.

• Slab bases are most suitable and economical for lightly

loaded column only.

• The design of column base plates requires consideration

of bearing pressure on the supporting material and
bending of the plate.
 Theoretical Considerations

It is assumed that the maximum bending moment occurs at

the edge of the column. As the slab base tends to bend
simultaneously about its two principal axes, the stress caused
by bending about one axis is influenced by the stress due to
bending about the other axis.
 Theoretical Considerations
Taking 1 unit length strip of slab
projection along xx-axis
𝑎
Maximum B.M. = 𝑤 × 1 × 𝑎 ×
2
𝑤𝑎2
= …..(1)
2
w is the intensity of bearing pressure
from concrete below the base plate.

Taking 1 unit length strip of slab projection along yy-axis

𝑏
Maximum B.M. = 𝑤 × 1 × 𝑏 ×
2
𝑤𝑏2
= ..……(2)
2
 Theoretical Considerations
If poison ratio (μ) is adopted as 0.3
𝑤𝑎2 𝑤𝑏2
The effective moment along xx-axis = − 0.3
2 2
𝑤
= 𝑎2 − 0.3𝑏 2 ….. (3)
2
The moment capacity of plate is,
𝑀𝑝 = 1.2𝑓𝑦 𝑍𝑒
Where 𝑍𝑒 = elastic section modulus of the base plate.
𝑡2
=1×
6
𝑡 = thickness of the base plate.
𝑡2 𝑡2
∴ 𝑀𝑝 = 1.2 × 𝑓𝑦 × 1 × = 1.2𝑓𝑦 ……(4)
6 6
 Theoretical Considerations
From Eqs. (3) and (4) we get,
𝑡2 𝑤 2
1.2𝑓𝑦 = 𝑎 − 0.3𝑏 2
6 2
Applying partial safety factor,
𝑓𝑦 𝑡 2 𝑤 2
1.2 = 𝑎 − 0.3𝑏 2
𝛾𝑚0 6 2
2 2 2 𝛾𝑚0
or 𝑡 = 2.5𝑤 𝑎 − 0.3𝑏
𝑓𝑦

𝛾𝑚0
Or 𝑡= 2.5𝑤 𝑎2 − 0.3𝑏 2
𝑓𝑦
 Steps for the design of slab base
Step-1: Assume a suitable grade of concrete. Considering
uniform stress at the bottom of plate, the bearing strength of
concrete is determined as 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 .

Step-2: The area of a slab base may be computed by

𝑃
𝐴=
0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘

Where P is the factored axial load on column.

Step-3: Select the size of base plate. For economy as far as
possible keep the projections a and b equal.
 Design procedure of slab base

Step-4: The intensity of pressure w, from the concrete pedestal

is determined by
𝑃
𝑤=
Area of base plate provided
Step-5: The minimum thickness required as per cl. 7.4.3.1 IS
800:2007
𝛾𝑚0
𝑡= 2.5𝑤 𝑎2 − 0.3𝑏 2 > 𝑡𝑓
𝑓𝑦
Where, 𝑡𝑓 = flange thickness of compression member
 Design procedure of slab base

Step-6: Provide nominal two or four 20-mm holding down

bolts.
Step-7: Check the weld length connecting the base plate with
the column (this check is required only for fillet welds)
DESIGN OF SLAB BASE
 Steps for the design of slab base
Step-1: Assume a suitable grade of concrete. Considering
uniform stress at the bottom of plate, the bearing strength of
concrete is determined as 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 .

Step-2: The area of a slab base may be computed by

𝑃
𝐴=
0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘

Where P is the factored axial load on column.

Step-3: Select the size of base plate. For economy as far as
possible keep the projections a and b equal.
 Design procedure of slab base

Step-4: The intensity of pressure w, from the concrete pedestal

is determined by
𝑃
𝑤=
Area of base plate provided
Step-5: The minimum thickness required as per cl. 7.4.3.1 IS
800:2007
𝛾𝑚0
𝑡= 2.5𝑤 𝑎2 − 0.3𝑏 2 > 𝑡𝑓
𝑓𝑦
Where, 𝑡𝑓 = flange thickness of compression member
 Design procedure of slab base

Step-6: Provide nominal two or four 20-mm holding down

bolts.
Step-7: Check the weld length connecting the base plate with
the column (this check is required only for fillet welds)
Examples: Design a slab base for a column ISHB 300 @ 618
N/m subjected to an factored axial compressive load of 1200 kN
for the following condition:
a) Load is transferred to the base plate by direct bearing of
column flanges.
b) Load is transferred to the base plate by welded connections;
the column end and the base plate are not machined for
bearing.
The base rests on concrete pedestal of grade M20.
Solution:
Assume Fe 410 grade of steel: 𝑓𝑢 = 410 MPa, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa
For M20 grade of concrete:
Bearing strength of concrete= 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 = 0.45 × 20 = 9 N/mm2
Partial safety factor: (Table 5, IS 800: 2007)
𝛾𝑚0 = 1.1
𝛾𝑚𝑤 = 1.25 (for shop welding)
Properties of ISHB 300 @ 618 N/m: [Table 1, SP-6(1)-1964]
Thickness of flange, 𝑡𝑓 = 10.6 mm
Thickness of web, 𝑡𝑤 = 9.4 mm
Depth of section, 𝐷 = 300 mm
Width of flange, 𝑏𝑓 = 250 mm
 1200×103
Required area of slab base, 𝐴 = = 133333.3 mm2
9

Let us provide a rectangular base plate.

Let the sides of the base plate be L and B.
Assuming the overhangs of the base plate beyond column
flanges to be a and b.
Let 𝑎 = 𝑏
Area of the base plate = 𝐷 + 2𝑎 × 𝑏𝑓 + 2𝑏 = 133333.3
⇒ 300 + 2𝑎 × 250 + 2𝑎 = 133333.3
⇒ 𝑎 = 45.5 mm ≃ 50 mm
Length of the base plate, 𝐿 = 300 + 2 × 50 = 400 mm
Width of the base plate, B = 250 + 2 × 50 = 350 mm
 𝑃
The bearing pressure of concrete, 𝑤 =
𝐿×𝐵
1200×103
=
400×350
= 8.57 N/mm2 < 9 N/mm2
Hence ok.
Thickness of slab base, (cl. 7.4.3.1 IS 800:2007)
𝛾𝑚0
𝑡= 2.5𝑤 𝑎2 − 0.3𝑏 2
𝑓𝑦

1.1
= 2.5 × 8.57 × 502 − 0.3 × 502 ×
250

=12.84 mm > 10.6 mm

Hence, provide a base plate 400×350×14 mm in size.

a) The load is transferred to the base plate by direct bearing. This
implies that the column end and base plate have been machined
for perfect bearing. Also, there is no bending moment. Therefore,
connection of column with base plate need not be designed.
However, to keep the column in position, two cleat angles of
nominal size 55×55×8 mm may be provided connecting the
column flanges with the base plate.
b) Column end and base plate have not been machined for
perfect bearing. Therefore, the load from the column will be
transferred to the base plate through welded connection.
Length available for welding around column profile,

𝐿𝑎 = 2 × 250 + 2 × 250 − 9.4 + 2 × 300 − 2 × 10.6

= 1539 mm
Let us provide 8 mm fillet weld.
Number of total end returns = 12
Effective length of weld = 1539 − 12 × 2 × 8 = 1347 mm
Throat thickness, 𝑡𝑡 = 0.7 × 8 = 5.6 mm
 𝑓𝑢
Strength of weld/ mm length = 1 × 𝑡𝑡 ×
3×𝛾𝑚𝑤
410
=1× 5.6 ×
3×1.25
= 1060.48 N/mm
1200×103
Required length of weld= = 1131.56 mm < 1347 mm
1060.48
Hence ok.
Since the base is subjected to only axial compressive load and
there is no bending moment, the base is not subjected to tension
in any of its part. Therefore, provide nominal 2, 20 mm
diameter bolts to keep the base in position.
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED
BASE PLATE
 Eccentrically loaded base plate
When the base plates are loaded eccentrically or are subjected
to axial loads as well as bending moment the pressure
distribution from the concrete does not remain uniform.
Let the column be subjected to a load P, at an eccentricity of e.
Therefore moment, 𝑀 = 𝑃𝑒
Due to axial load P, the pressure distribution is uniform and
stress diagram is rectangular.
𝑃 𝑃
The direct stress = =
𝐴1 𝐿𝐵

Where, 𝐴1 = area of base plate provided.

𝐿 = length of the base plate
𝐵 = width of the base plate
 Design of Eccentrically loaded base plate
Due to the bending moment the bending stress developed is
𝑀
= ± 𝑦
𝐼
𝑀 𝐿 6𝑀 6𝑃𝑒
=± 1 × = ± 2 = ± 2
𝐵𝐿3 2 𝐵𝐿 𝐵𝐿
12

The combined stress due to axial load and bending moment

𝑃 6𝑃𝑒 𝑃 6𝑒
𝑓= ± = 1±
𝐿𝐵 𝐵𝐿2 𝐿𝐵 𝐿

Depending upon the eccentricity and length of the base plate

three cases are possible.
6𝑒 𝐿
Case I When there is no tension, 1 − =0⇒ 𝑒=
𝐿 6
𝐿 𝐿
Case II When the tension developed is small 𝑒 = to
6 3
𝐿
Case III When the tension developed is substantial 𝑒 >
3
 𝐿 Design Procedure
Case I 𝑒 <
6
The entire base plate is under compression. The maximum
pressure from concrete must not exceed the bearing strength of
concrete (0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 ).
𝑃 6𝑒
1. Combined stresses, f = 1±
𝐿𝐵 𝐿
𝐿 2𝑃
When 𝑒 = , 𝑓= , 0 respectively.
6 𝐿𝐵

2. The combined stress should be less than or equal to 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 .

2𝑃 2𝑃
≤ 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 ⇒ 𝐵 =
𝐿𝐵 0.45𝐿𝑓𝑐𝑘

3. The thickness of base plate is computed by equating the

moment capacity of the base plate to the moment at the critical
section, which is assumed to be at the outer edge of the column
flange.
 Design Procedure
𝐿 𝐿
Case II 𝑒 = to
6 3

Most part of the base plate is in under compression, with little

or negligible tension on the remaining part.
1. Calculation of the length of the plate under compression (x):
𝑥 𝐿
+𝑒 =
3 2
𝐿
⇒ 𝑥=3 − 𝑒
2
 Design Procedure

2. Calculation of the width of the base plate:

Compressive force(C) in concrete = area of stress triangle × width
0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝑥
𝐶= ×𝐵 =𝑃
2
2𝑃
⇒ 𝐵=
0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝑥
2𝑃
⇒ 𝐵= 𝐿
0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 ×3 2−𝑒

3. The thickness of base plate is computed by equating the

moment capacity of the base plate to the moment at the critical
section, which is assumed to be at the outer edge of the column
flange.
 Design Procedure
𝐿
Case III 𝑒 >
3

Part of the base will be in compression with substantial tension

in the remaining part and will be taken up by anchor bolts.
1. The size of the base plate (L×B) is determined as before or
assumed.
2. From the equilibrium of forces,
𝑃 = 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝑥 𝐵 − 𝐹𝑏
𝐿 𝑥
and 𝑀 = 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝑥 𝐵 − − 𝐹𝑏 𝑎
2 2
Where, 𝑃 = axial compressive force
𝐹𝑏 = tensile force in the bolt
𝑎 = distance of line of anchor bolts from c.g.
of the column.
 Design Procedure

The value of x may be determined from the above force and

moment equations,
2 0.5
𝐿 𝐿 𝑀+𝑃𝑎
𝑥 = +𝑎− + 𝑎 − 2×
2 2 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝐵

The maximum moment is determined at the critical section.

𝑥
𝑀 = 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝑥 𝐵 𝑐2 −
2
Where, 𝑐2 = outstand of base plate from the column flange.
3. The thickness of base plate is computed by equating the
moment capacity of the base plate to the moment at the critical
section, which is assumed to be at the outer edge of the column
flange.
 Design Procedure

4. Calculation of design tensile force in the bolt:

𝑃 = 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝑥 𝐵 − 𝐹𝑏
⇒ 𝐹𝑏 = 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝑥𝐵 + 𝑃
5. Welded connection is designed to join the column section
with the base for the maximum tension in the column flange
due to the applied moment.
GUSSET BASE
 Gusset Base
• In gusset base, the column is connected to base plate through
gusset plates.
• Gusseted bases are used for column carrying heavy loads
(including moment).
• The load is transferred to the base partly through bearing and
partly through gusset plate.
• The gussets and stiffeners bear the base slab against bending
and therefore, a thinner base plate can be provided.
 Gusseted base

Clause 7.4.2, IS 800 - 2007: For stanchion with gusseted

bases, the gusset plates, cleat angles, fastenings etc. in
combination with the bearing area of the shaft shall be
sufficient to take the loads, bending moments & reactions to
the base plate without exceeding specified stress. All the
bearing surfaces shall be machined to ensure perfect contact.

Clause 7.4.2.1, IS 800 - 2007: Where the ends of the column

shaft and the gusset plates are not faced for complete bearing,
the welding, fastenings connecting them to the base plate shall
be sufficient to transmit all the forces to which the base is
subjected.
 Theoretical Considerations

The critical section is assumed to

lie at the root of the fillet of the
angle section for bolted
connections as the load from the
flanges of the column is transferred
to the base plate through the gusset
material.

For unit width of plate, bending moment at the critical section

𝑤𝑐 2
𝑀=
2
Where, w = intensity of pressure from concrete under the slab
base.
𝑐 = the portion of the base plate acting as a cantilever
 Theoretical Considerations

The design bending strength at the critical section

𝑓𝑦
𝑀𝑑 = 1.2 𝑍𝑒
𝛾𝑚0
𝑓𝑦 1×𝑡 2 𝑓𝑦 𝑡 2
= 1.2 × × = 0.2
𝛾𝑚0 6 𝛾𝑚0
Now, 𝑀 = 𝑀𝑑
𝑤𝑐 2 𝑓𝑦 𝑡 2
⇒ = 0.2
2 𝛾𝑚0
𝑤𝛾
⇒ 𝑡=𝑐 2.5 𝑚0
𝑓𝑦
Where, 𝑡 is the aggregate thickness of base plate and cleat angle
for bolted gusset base and thickness of the base plate for welded
gusset base, at the critical section.
 Steps for the design of gusseted base
Step-1: Assume a suitable grade of concrete. Depending
upon the grade of concrete used, the bearing strength of
concrete is determined by 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 .

Step-2: The area of a slab base may be computed by

𝑃
𝐴=
0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘

Where P is the factored load on column.

 Steps for the design of gusseted base

Step-3: The size of the gusset material is assumed.

• The gusset plate should not be less than 16 mm in thickness
for bolted gusset base.
• The gusset/cleat angle is chosen so as to accommodate two
rows of bolts in the vertical leg and one row of bolts in the
horizontal leg. Therefore, an unequal angle section is
provided.
• The thickness of cleat angle is kept approximately equal to
the thickness of gusset plate.
• The length of the gusset material is normally kept equal to
the length of the base plate, parallel to the flange of the
column.
• For welded gusset plate, cleat angles will not be required.
 Steps for the design of gusseted base

Step-4: The dimension of base plate parallel to the web

For bolted connection:
𝐿 = depth of section + 2 (thickness of gusset plate + leg
length of angle + overhang)
For welded connection:
𝐿 = depth of section + 2×(thickness of gusset plate +
overhang)
• The dimension of base plate parallel to flange,
𝐴
𝐵=
𝐿
 Steps for the design of gusseted base

Step-5: The intensity of pressure w, from the concrete pedestal

is determined by
𝑃
𝑤=
Area of base plate provided

Step-6: The thickness of the base plate is computed by flexural

strength at the critical section.
Step-7: Holding down bolts 2 or 4 in numbers and of 20-mm
diameter are usually provided.
Example. A column section ISHB 350 @ 710.2 N/m carries a
factor axial compressive load of 1700 kN and factored bending
moment of 85 kN-m. Design the base plate and its connections.
Assume concrete pedestal of M-20 grade.
DESIGN OF GUSSET BASE
Example. A column section ISHB 350 @ 710.2 N/m carries a
factor axial compressive load of 1700 kN and factored bending
moment of 85 kN-m. Design the base plate and its connections.
Assume concrete pedestal of M-20 grade.
Solution:
Assume Fe 410 grade of steel: 𝑓𝑢 = 410 MPa, 𝑓𝑦 = 250 MPa
For M20 grade of concrete:
Bearing strength of concrete= 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 = 0.45 × 20 = 9 N/mm2
Partial safety factor: (Table 5, IS 800: 2007)
𝛾𝑚0 = 1.1 𝛾𝑚𝑏 = 1.25
Properties of ISHB 350 @ 710.2 N/m: [table 1, SP-6(1)-1964]
𝑡𝑓 = 11.6 mm 𝑡𝑤 = 10.1 mm
𝐷 = 350 mm 𝑏𝑓 = 250 mm
𝐴 = 9221 mm2

Design compressive load, 𝑃 = 1700 kN

Design bending moment, 𝑀 = 85 kN-m
𝑀 85×106
Eccentricity, 𝑒= = = 50 mm
𝑃 1700×103
Let us provide 16 mm thick gusset plate, one on each side of the
column flanges and two cleat angles ISA 200×150×15 mm.
Provide a length of base plate, 𝐿 = 550 mm.
𝑒 50 1 1
Now, = = <
𝐿 550 11 6

Hence, the base plate is in compression throughout.

To limit the bearing pressure from concrete to 0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 , the width
required,
2𝑃 2×1700×103
𝐵= = = 686.87 mm ≃ 690 mm
𝐿×0.45𝑓𝑐𝑘 550×0.45×20
Projection of base plate beyond leg angle toe
690; 350:2×16:2×150
= = 4 mm
2

Let us provide a base plate 690×550 mm in size.

Area provided, 𝐴 = 690 × 550 = 379.5 × 103 mm2
Section modulus of the base plate,
550×6902
𝑍𝑒 = = 43.64 × 106 mm3
6

Maximum pressure,
𝑃 𝑀 1700×103 85×106
𝑓𝑚𝑎𝑥 = + = +
𝐴 𝑍𝑒 379.5×103 43.64×106

= 6.43 N/mm2 < 9 N/mm2

Minimum pressure,
𝑃 𝑀 1700×103 85×106
𝑓𝑚𝑖𝑛 = − = −
𝐴 𝑍𝑒 379.5×103 43.64×106

= 2.53 N/mm2 < 9 N/mm2

350
x

551 139
x

2.53
5.64 6.43

690
Calculation for the thickness of base plate:
Base pressure at section x-x,
551
= 2.53 + 6.43 − 2.53 × = 5.64 N/mm2
690
Moment at critical section x-x,
139 1 2
= 5.64 × 139 × + × 139 × 6.43 − 5.64 × × 139
2 2 3
= 59573.1 N-mm
Moment capacity of base plate,
𝑓𝑦
𝑀𝑑 = 1.2 𝑍
𝛾𝑚0 𝑒
250 1
= 1.2 × × × 1 × 𝑡𝑎2 = 45.45 𝑡𝑎2 N-mm
1.1 6

45.45 𝑡𝑎2 = 59573.1

⇒ 𝑡𝑎 = 36.2 mm (aggregate thickness of base plate
and cleat angle)
Therefore, thickness of base plate,
𝑡𝑏 = 36.2 − 15 = 21.2 mm ≃ 22 mm > 11.6 mm
Provide a base plate 690×550×22 mm in size.
Bolted connection:
Provide 24-mm diameter bolts of grade 4.6.
The bolts will be in single shear.
Strength bolt in single shear (cl. 10.3.3, IS 800:2007)
𝑓 𝜋×242 400
𝐴𝑛𝑏 𝑢𝑏 0.78× 4 ×
3
= 3
= × 10;3 = 65.2 kN
𝛾𝑚𝑏 1.25

Strength of bolt in bearing = 2.5𝑘𝑏 𝑑𝑡𝑓𝑢 /𝛾𝑚𝑏 (cl. 10.3.4, IS

800:2007)
For 24 mm diameter bolts the minimum edge distance,
𝑒 = 1.5 × 𝑑0 = 1.5 × 24 + 2 = 39 mm
The minimum pitch, p = 2.5 × 24 = 60 mm
Let us provide an edge distance of 40 mm and pitch of 65 mm.
𝑘𝑏 is smaller of
𝑒 40 𝑝 65
= = 0.51 , − 0.25 = − 0.25 = 0.58 ,
3𝑑0 3×26 3𝑑0 3×26
𝑓𝑢𝑏 400
= = 0.98 and 1.0
𝑓𝑢 410

Hence 𝑘𝑏 = 0.51
410
∴ Strength in bearing = 2.5 × 0.51 × 24 × 11.6 × × 10;3
1.25
= 116.43 kN
Hence, the strength of bolt = 65.2 kN
Assuming column end and gusset material to have complete
bearing, 50% of the load will be assumed to pass directly and
50% of the load will pass through the connections.
Number of bolts required to connect column flanges with gusset
0.5×1700
plates, 𝑛1 = = 13.03 ≃ 16
65.2
Provide 8, 24 mm diameter bolts on each flange in two rows as
shown in the figure.
The number of bolts required to connect the cleat angle with
gusset plate will be the same.
Dimension of gusset plate:
Height of gusset plate = 200 + 2 × 40 + 65 = 345 mm
Length of gusset plate = length of base plate = 550 mm
Provide gusset plate 550×345×16 mm in size.
 250

Gusset plate
550×345×16 mm

Cleat angle
200×150×15 mm

550

Fig. Gusseted base with bolted connections